Home

ControlLogix System User Manual - Columbia Electric Supply Pasco

1. Data froma Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Word1 BT_int_buffer_read 0 BT_input 0 0 Word 2 BT_int_buffer_read 1 BT_input 0 1 Word 3 BT_int_buffer_read 2 BT_input 0 2 BT_input 0 3 3 4 BT_input 0 4 Word 1 BT_int_buffer_read 0 BT_input 1 0 Word 2 BT_int_buffer_read 1 BT_input 1 1 Word 3 BT_int_buffer_read 2 BT_input 1 2 Word 4 BT_int_buffer_read 3 BT_input 1 3 Word 5 BT_int_buffer_read 4 BT_input 1 4 Input data that is allocated for the first BT module Input data that is allocated for the next BT module The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the first BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs The MSG instruction reads the next module This procedures lets you vary the number of INTs that you read from each module The FAL instruction moves the data to the next element of dimension 0 of the DINT array Each element of this dimension corresponds to a different BT module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 20 16 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network To read multiple block transfer modules e Create a User Defined Data Typ
2. Workstation Controller TCD ED 2 RDX 2 RDX 3 TXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 4 DTR COMMON COMMON 6 DSR 6 DSR 7 RTS 7 RTS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9 9 42231 e Attach the shield to both connectors Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable 21 3 Step 2 Configure a Serial Driver 10 1756 CP3 cable 20884 Connect the cable to the controller and to your workstation Start RSLinx software From the Communications menu select Configure Drivers From the Available Driver Types list select RS 232 DF1 Devices Click Add New Click OK to accept the default name for the driver From the Comm Port drop down list select the serial port on the workstation that the cable is connected to From the Device drop down list select Logix 5550 Serial Port Click Auto Configure Does the dialog box display the following message Auto Configuration Successful If Then Yes Click OK No Go to step 6 and verify that you selected the correct Comm Port Click Close Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 21 4 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable Step 3 Select a Path A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller B From the Communications menu select Who Active Workstation Linx Gateways E
3. controller condition message EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 H CRES File Arith Logical CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos Write integers to a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller condition fal_control FAL 4 E CRES gt File Arith Logical CEN Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG J E 4 5 Type Unconfigured CEN Message Control message CDN gt CER gt Where dint array Is an array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int _buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 5 18 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click M B Select a configuration for the message Table 5 A Message to a ControlLogix controller If you want to read receive the data F
4. topic_1 topic_2 I Next to the topic from Create a Polled Topic click the sign tags in the offline RSLogix 5000 project tags in the ControlLogix controller _ Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 L Offline L f Online J Next to Offline click the sign controller scope tags Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 Offline arrays and structures at array_1 the controller scope program scope tags counter_1 Program MainProgram Online K On the left select the entry that contains the required tag address Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 14 14 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 controller scope tags Offline arrays and structures at array_1 the controller scope counter_1 program Program MainProgram scope tags Online bool_1 dint_1 real_1 single elementtags BOOLs DINTs REALs etc L On the right double click the tag that contains the required data i e the address for the RSView tag M Click A
5. Tag Name Value BTR_cfg ex Properties for the first t t p BTR_cfg 0 eee BT module BTR_cfg 0 REQ_LEN number of elements to transfer BTIR_cfg 0 Channel channel A or B of the 1756 DHRIO module that is connected to the RIO network BIR_cfg 0 Rack rack number of the module octal BIR_cfg 0 Group group number of the module depends on chassis addressing BIR_cfg 0 Slot slot number of the module depends on chassis addressing BIR_cfg 0 Path path to the 1756 DHRIO module A Right click and select Go to Message Path Editor B Select the 1756 DHRIO module C Choose OK Properties for the next pF BIR_cfg 1 BT module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 22 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Convert the INTs to DINTs 1 Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module B7R DNis on this rung converts the INT values from the BT module to DINT values for use in the project e The MOV instruction sets the length of the FAL instruction equal to the number of elements that the MSG reads e The FAL instruction then loads the values from B7R_int_buffer_read into BT_input This converts the values to DINTs for use in the project e BTR_index determines where in the first dimension of B7_ nputto store the values Each element of this dimension co
6. To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following e Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet e Select the network and press the ye FF AB_DF1 x DF1 key e Click the sign E Expand the network from step B until you see the 1756 DHRIO module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax p gt fF xx 1756 DHRIO F Right click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration G Click the Channel Configuration tab Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 17 10 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 42193 H If Channel A is configured for DH type the slot number of the controller that you want to receive local messages over this channel If Channel B is configured for DH type the slot number of the controller that you want to receive local messages over this channel J To download the configuration to the module choose OK Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 11 Add a 1756 DHRIO Module Determine if you must complete this task If a Then ControlLogix controller sends the message Complete this task PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller sends the Go to Access ControlLogix Data on mess
7. DOOOO zine J F ae Ee JPL Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Type Unconfigured Message Control message M Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to an SLC 500 or MicroLogix controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e SLC 500 and MicroLogix controllers require 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 7 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a MicroLogix controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller condition message EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured END Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 H CRES File Arith Logical CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_
8. Datafroma Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Word1 BT_int_buffer_read 0 BT_input 0 0 Word 2 BT_int_buffer_read 1 BT_input 0 1 Word 3 BT_int_buffer_read 2 BT_input 0 2 BT_input 0 3 3 4 BT_input 0 4 Word 1 BT_int_buffer_read 0 BT_input 1 0 Word 2 BT_int_buffer_read 1 BT_input 1 1 Word 3 BT_int_buffer_read 2 BT_input 1 2 Word 4 BT_int_buffer_read 3 BT_input 1 3 Word 5 BT_int_buffer_read 4 BT_input 1 4 Input data that is allocated for the first BT module Input data that is allocated for the next BT module The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the first BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs The MSG instruction reads the next module This procedures lets you vary the number of INTs that you read from each module The FAL instruction moves the data to the next element of dimension 0 of the DINT array Each element of this dimension corresponds to a different BT module Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 13 To read multiple block transfer modules e Create a User Defined Data Type e Create the Array for the Input Data e Send a Block Transfer Rea
9. Right click local_ENB ENET and select New Module Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK 42580 Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 3 6 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt Description Address Host Name Name Comm Format Rack Optimization x Slot fo Chassis Size fio Revision E fi H Electronic Keying Compatible Module z t 42580 G G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying H Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address b
10. Workstation AB_KTC x ControlNet XXX XXX XXX XXX 1756 CNB Backplane 1756 Ax pm FF x 1756 Lx F Select the ControlLogix controller G Choose Apply and confirm the update H Click the Data Collection tab Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 5 _ DataSource Data Collection Advanced Communication Processor Type ogix5000 Data Collection Mode IV Polled Messages mSec 1000 lt I Type the update I Unsolicited Messages rate ms for the J Gache Unsolicited Date data J Sendlellitnsalicited updates Communications Time Out Secs 20 J Click the Use Use Symbols 5 Symbols check box IV Limit Maximum Packets 20 42429 5 hie Select Tag Name Database 24 xX Look in a Projects 7 c Samples Your _ASLogis5000_Project File name K Files of type SR Ea a aani ATena K Select RSLogix 5000 acd L Select the RSLogix 5000 project for this topic M Choose Open N Choose Done and then Yes Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 14 6 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create a Polled Node A Open the RSView project im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project i x
11. x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET q A Right click 1ocal_ENB ENET and select New Module B Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK 42580 C Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis D Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 7 C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt Description Address Host Name Name Comm Format Rack Optimization x Slot fo 4 Chassis Size fio Revision a fi H Electronic Keying Compatible Module bd t 42580 G G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying H Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an D
12. C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 13 18 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1640300 16 03FF r gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 14 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to communicate with tags in either of the Procedure following types of RS
13. CIP Data Table Read Source Element first elem ent of the tag that contains data in the other controller write send the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number o f elements to transfer Destination Element Table 17 B Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s first elem And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type ent of the tag for the data in the other controller Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_ buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination
14. Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project ss N gt CO oO ON Yes From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters OoorFwWwoh In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project e CO oO ON Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 25 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established
15. If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 12 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 4 8 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller 1 Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no gt gt Go to the next step yes output module gt Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the A Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of the module if it loses communication other controller with the other controller B Paste the module into the 1 0 configuration of this controller C Go to the next task stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET 21794 AENx y name_of_rail q Adda 1794 1 0 module here 2 Right click the AEN module and select New Module 3 Select the type of module and click OK 4 _y Name sle g 5 Description A 6 Comm Format 7 Revision ESI i H Electronic Keying Compatible Module x lt i 42420 4 Type a name for the module 5 Type or select the slo
16. MultiHop Yes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 17 D Click the MultiHop tab To Address Type To Address z This PLC5 1756 CNB Node dec a ControlLogix Backplane E 1756 Backplane Slotfdec lt F 42426 E Type the ControlNet node number of the 1756 CNB module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller F Type the slot number of the ControlLogix controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 11 18 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 When to Use This Procedure Chapter 12 Route PLC 5 Messages Between ControlNet Networks You can use ControlLogix communication modules to route a message between PLC 5 controllers that are on different networks i e a remote message The following example depicts a ControlLogix chassis with two 1756 CNB modules that route a message from a ControlNet network to a different ControlNet network EXAMPLE Message from a PLC 5C on a ControlNet network to a PLC 5C on a different ControlNet network CIC NIN BIB ControlNet node 3 node 5 network A ControlNet network B node 2 node 1 p P L Message x c C 5 5 c C Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 12 2 Route PLC 5 Messages Between ControlNet Netw
17. Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_ buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_ buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 C Click the Communication tab D In the Path box type the following path 2 station address where station address is the DF1 address of the controller that is receiving the message E Leave the communication method at the default settings of e CIP e Cache Connections This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port F Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 19 10 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network
18. Step 5 Check the LED Once you download the project to the controller use the RS232 LED on the front of the controller to determine if there are other stations on the DH 485 network RUN M a 1 0 EE S232 BAT EEE HEE OK RUN REM PROG 42525 If the RS232 LED is Then flashing There are no other stations on the DH 485 network steady There is at least one other station on the DH 485 network Step 6 Stagger the As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Messages Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 20 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Use this procedure to monitor and control I O over a remote I O When to Use This n
19. msg_read DN ints_to_dints FAL AE CRES gt File Arith Logical CEN gt Control ints_to_dints Length t DN gt Position 0 Mode ALL CER gt Dest dints_input ints_to_dints POS Expression int_buffer_read ints_to_dints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope int_buffer_read array that stores the data from the BT module INT length name_of controller controller ints_to_dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name_of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 controller controller FAL Length number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length dint_inputs array that stores the input data from the module DINT length name of controller for use by the controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Where Is the length controller number of elements to transfer Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 13 Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung The application writes configuration and output data to dints_output which is an array of DINTs Before the controller sends the data to the module the FAL instruction moves the values to int_buffer_write This converts them to 16 bit integers INTs Only include the msg_read EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer read message to the same module msg_read EN msg_write EN dints_to_ints FAL 4 E 4 E C
20. sufficient sample time sampled wiring_mode omit the time stamp Float Data wiring_mode floating point mode does not provide sufficient sample time time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data wiring_mode omit the time stamp Integer Data wiring_mode isolated or temperature measuring analog input 25 ms sample time or greater is sufficient time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data sample time must be less than 25 ms time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data analog output associated inputs are REALs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data associated inputs are INTs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 8 8 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Name Slot a pe Comm Format Revision ER f H Electronic Keying Compatible Module x a G 42420 Description G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying H
21. 1761 NET AIC connection from ControlLogix controller to port 1 or port 2 1747 AIC e DH 485 network H Mal t S l 1761 NET AIC EPEE Ja MicroLogix controller SLC 5 03 controller CompactLogix controller 42589 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 19 2 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 1 Connect the Controller to an AIC e Step 2 Configure the Serial Port e Step 3 Enter a Message e Step 4 Configure the Message e Step 5 Check the LED e Step 6 Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 3 Step 1 Connect the is ae i install a ee ee a oe AIC which connects the ControlLogix controller to the DH 48 Controller to an AIC A 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter AIC RS 485 port gt lt q port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 DC SOURCE port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE gt lt i dc power source selector switch EXTERNAL D GA J cae lt q terminals for external 24V dc power supply A Install an AIC 1 Connect the AIC to a 24 VDC power supply 2 On the DC SOURCE switch select External
22. 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1640300 16 03FF r gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 8 16 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlINet Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 9 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are wired Procedure to 1771 I O modules when a e 1756 CNB module connects the local chassis to a ControlNet network e 1771 ACN adapter connects the 1771 I O modules to the same ControlNet network ControlLogix Chassis with 1771 ACN Adapter 1756 CNB Module B an g Cc PHIM TINT a 42518 ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure TIP To create and manage tags as you program your logic use these tips e To create a tag 1 Type the name for the tag 2 Right click the tag and choose New tag_name Clear Dest Right click the tag and choose Edit tag_name Properties Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 2 Com
23. E Motion Trajectory Planner Position Velocity 1756 M08SE SERCOS Module SERCOS Drive Position Velocity Mea C Motor Feedback e The ControlLogix controller contains a high speed motion task which executes motion requests from the routines and generates position and velocity profile information Each ControlLogix controller controls up to 16 1756 M02AE or 1756 M08SE modules The 1756 M02AE servo module connects to a servo drive and closes a high speed position and velocity loop Each 1756 M02AE module controls up to two axes The 1756 MO8SE SERCOS module connects to one or more SERCOS drives and controls up to 8 axes Each SERCOS drive closes a high speed position and velocity loop RSLogix 5000 software provides complete axis configuration and motion programming support Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 2 Program Motion Control How to Use This Procedure To program motion control Select a CST Master Device Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 e Select a CST Master Device e Add the Motion Module e 1756 MO8SE Add the SERCOS Drive e Create a Motion Group e Assign the Properties of the Motion Group e Configure the Axis e Run Hookup Tests e Develop Logic for Motion Control For more information see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 If your controller uses a motion axis you must defin
24. J Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 5 Add the 1771 ACN Module E 140 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of 1771 ACN that is in the remote chassis and click OK C _y Name Node 4 lt q D Description a Input Size H Dutput Size Comm Format Rack Optimization a E Revision Ro fi H Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 F 42434 C Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Specify the Input Size and Output Size lf the chassis uses Then type or select Example 2 slot addressing number of slots in the chassis 2 For a 4 slot chassis specify 2 for the input and output sizes 1 slot addressing number of slots in the chassis For a 4 slot chassis specify 4 for the input and output sizes 1 2 slot addressing number of slots in the chassisx2 For a 4 slot chassis specify 8 for the input and output sizes F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM0
25. Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 7 9 Requested Packet Interval RPI ms 10 T Inhibit Module 11 Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 9 Type the rate that you want time critical data to transfer with the PanelView terminal 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box 11 If communication with the modules fails how do you want the controller to respond If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 12 Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 6 8 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Organize Your Data Organize your data for the PanelView based on how the data is used For data that is Do this time critical e g controlsa Use the I O tags of the PanelView machine The tags for this data were created when you added the PanelView to the 1 0 configuration of the controller They are similar to the tags of I O modules See Table 6 A not time critical Create arrays to store the data 1 For each PanelView screen create a BOOL array with enough elements for the bit le
26. MainProgram Scope MainProgram Show Show All Sot Tag Name gt Alias For Type Tag Name Base Tag 42421 p B Select the scope of the descriptive tag C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 5 D Click the V E Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it is available All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Next to name slot X click the sign Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the 1756 CNB module in the chassis slot slot number of the module X type of device It Then input I output 0 G Next to name slot X Data click the sign H Click name slot X Data ly where y is the group number that the device is wired to I To the right of the selection click p J Click the bit number of the device K Press the Enter key or click another cell When you finish the Tags window should look similar to this Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start Local 5 1 Data 0 1 C Local 5 1 Data 0 1 C A start is an alias for bit 1 of word 0 of slot 5 in the local chassis Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 16 6 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Step 3 Set the Scanner to Run Mode S Tasks Bg
27. Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1680300 16 03FF g gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 10 16 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 11 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to send a message from one controller to another controller over an ControlNet network Procedure e ControlLogix controller to another Controllogix controller e ControlLogix controller to a FLexLogix controller e ControlLogix controller to a PLC 5 controller e PLC 5 controller to a ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller PLC 5 Controller m o CR cm SENT Ls a B
28. Your ASView_Project B System Project Settings i Channel E Channel de Node q B Node AM Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts Activity Log Setup mike be IW Scan Class a Tag Database Le Tag Monitor User Accounts 4 43081 B Double click Node Y Data Source Direct Driver OPC Server DDE Server D Name V Enabled Sceee SS Name gl E 42430 C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click M F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G Click Accept H Click Close Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 7 Import Logix5000 Tags To import tags from an RSLogix 5000 project into your RSView project use the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility e Create an L5K File e Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility e Use the Utility to Create a CSV File e Import the CSV File Create an L5K File A Open the RSLogix 5000 project that contains the tags that you want to access B From the File menu choose Save As Save As Savein Poets e LE Samples File name I c gt Save as type RSLogix 5000 Import Export File L5K 7 Cancel Help A 8070 C Select RSLogix 5000 Import Export File L5K D Choose Save Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 14 8 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network
29. communication failure p o B 41031 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 15 2 Monitor Connections Monitor a Connection If communication with a device in the I O configuration of the controller does not occur for 100 ms the communication times out and the controller produces the following warnings e The I O LED on the front of the controller flashes green e A N shows over the I O configuration folder and over the device s that has timed out e A module fault code is produced which you can access through Module Properties dialog box for the module GSV instruction How do you want to handle the loss of communication with a module in the I O configuration of the controller If you want to Then determine if communication has timed out Enter the following rung and add the specific action to occur with any device If communication times out with at least one device module in the 1 0 configuration of the controller the 1 0 LED on the front of the controller flashes green e The GSV instruction gets the status of the I O LED and stores it in the IT_O_ LED tag e If IT O LED equal 2 the controller has lost communication with at least one device GSV EQU Get System Value Equal CIP Object Class MODULE Source A _O_LED CIP Object Name Attribute Name LedStatus Source B 2 Dest _O_LED 42468 where I_O_LED isa DINT tag that stores the status of the I O LED on the front of
30. da gids eg 2S 4g eee 4S eines 26 2 Replace a Battery Assembly sas Je cane Seed mae 26 4 Remove the Existing Battery Assembly 26 4 Install a New Battery Assembly 26 5 Check the BAT UE Dy 205k e s Oe hohe Oe RE Be Resend ok 26 6 Table of Contents ix Appendix A Map a PLC SLC Address When To Use This Procedure 0 0000000 A 1 Mapa Ress So oe otha eee Aha Rea be RES OEE SA A 1 Appendix B Estimate Execution Time Appendix C Estimate Memory Use Appendix D Determine When Data Is Updated 0 nee D 1 Appendix E Reconfigure an 1 0 module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Table of Contents x Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 1 Configure an EtherNet IP Module When to Use This Use this procedure to configure any of the following modules Procedure 1756 ENBx or ENET 1794 AENx module module foteteiefotetefetetelelele elolo a Keieierofefeteloieieieiolelelele Min Kelele 5060005000000003 5500555008000030 HGOOGOOSOOGOOOCO 5003000000000000 0 ie I switch 42872 You can configure a module either e before you install the module Configure the module in a temporary location such as a chassis that is on a test bench After you configure the module install it in your syst
31. 9 Unscheduled Programs p Where name a Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Handler A Sine MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 42376 Double click Controller Tags Tag Name Value name slot 0 L Next to name slot 0 click the sign Is name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the 1756 CNB module in the chassis slot py slot number of the module Tag Name name slot 0 esa name slot 0 CommandRegister EEN C Next to name slot 0 CommandRegister click the sign Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 7 Tag Name name slot 0 name slot 0 CommandRegister kaal name slot 0 CommandRegister Run 0 D In name slot 0 CommandRegister enter a 1 Tag Name name slot 0 name slot 0 CommandRegister isis name slot 0 CommandRegister Run 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 16 8 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 17 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network When to Use This Use this procedure to send a message over a
32. Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 9 IMPORTANT F Select a Comm Format If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g Listen Only Input Data If this module is a And And you want to Then select diagnostic digital input Full Diagnostics Input Data non diagnostic digital input local chassis time stamp a change in data CST Timestamped Input Data omit time stamps Input Data remote chassis p Rack Optimization diagnostic digital output p schedule when to apply outputs Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data not schedule when to apply Full Diagnostics Output Data outputs fused digital output p schedule when to apply outputs CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data p not schedule when to apply CST Timestamped Fuse Data outputs Output Data non diagnostic and non fused local chassis schedule when to apply outputs Scheduled Output Data Migital opu not schedule when to apply Output Data outputs remote chassis p Rack Optimization non isolated analog input floating point mode provides time stamp when the data is CST Timestamped Float Data sufficient sample time sampled wiring_mode omit the time stamp Float Data wiring_mode floating point mode does not provide sufficient sample time time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamp
33. In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag_name From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK e condition E MSG e 4 FE 4 E Type Unconfigured e Message Control message M7 e e Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 17 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix
34. Nextto name slot X click the sign 2 Click the Data member 3 To the right of the Data member click M A Click the point number of the device analog 1 Next to name slot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click ChzData Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the communication module in the chassis such as a 1756 ENBx or 1756 CNB module slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 Chz channel that the device is wired to G Press the Enter key or click another cell Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 3 14 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network When you finish the Tags window should look similar to the following Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 Data 1 C conveyor 1 Data 1 C start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor A Even if the I O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format address the required point as described in step F Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 Data 1 C conveyor l Slot 1 Data 1 C startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor However the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the A Because the module uses the Rack
35. Remote Bridge Link ID link ID of the DH network of the controller that receives the message SLC 500 controller Communication Command PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address This Controller starting address of the data in the controller that sends the message Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Data Table Address Target Device starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message Local Bridge Addr octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the controller that sends the message Remote Bridge Addr 0 Remote Station Address node number of the controller that receives the message Remote Bridge Link ID link ID of the network of the controller that receives the message Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 18 8 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 19 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to get information to and from controllers over a DH 485 network E aig FlexLogix controller i so Ly connection from FlexLogix controller to port 1 or port 2 ControlLogix controller
36. Select the 1771 ACN module that is in the chassis with the block transfer module C Choose OK Although your logic will control the path the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial selection RIO or ControlNet Contro Net Slot slot number of the BT module Although your logic will control this value the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value 0 15 4 How many devices require block transfer instructions If Then 16 or less devices Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked more than 16 devices A Select 16 devices that require the most frequent updates B Is this message to one of those devices If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 9 12 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules Input data from the first BT module Input data from the next BT module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Use this procedure to program a single MSG instruction to read data from multiple block transfer modules The following diagram shows the flow of data for a block transfer read The block transfer write sequence works in the opposite order p
37. Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters m dJ RUN In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project ooo N Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 17 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work F 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A VO oinguan 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 gt A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2
38. Sunday 88 hours 3 percentage off time 88 168 52 4 Using Table 26 1 Worst case estimates of life for the 1756 BATA battery on page 26 3 determine the estimated worst case battery life before and after the BAT LED turns on 5 For each year of battery life decrease the time before the BAT LED turns on by the percentage that is shown in the table Do not decrease the time after the BAT LED turns on Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module 26 3 IMPORTANT If the BAT LED turns on when you apply power to the controller the battery life may be less then the table below indicates Some of the battery life may have been used up while the controller was off and unable to turn on the BAT LED Table 26 1 Worst case estimates of life for the 1756 BATA battery Controller Temp Time before BAT LED turns on Time after BAT LED turns on Power off 100 Power off 50 Yearly aitten power tb 100 decrease 1756 L55M12 60 C 190 days 396 days 11 190 days VSG EOOMIS aT 299 days 562 days 5 299 days 0 C 268 days 562 days 6 268 days 1756 L55M14 60 C 130 days 270 days 11 139 days 25 C 213 days 391 days 5 228 days 0C 180 days 381 days 6 193 days 1756 L55M16 60 C 71 days 160 days 13 76 days 25 C 133 days 253 days 5 142 days 0 C 105 days 220 days 6 112 days 1756 L55M22 Use the values for the 1756 L55M13 controller 17
39. Y Data Source Direct Driver OPC Server DDE Server D Name V Enabled Sceee SS Name gl E 42430 C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click M F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G In the Access Path box type the name of the topic from Create a Unsolicited Topic H Click Accept I Click Close Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 23 Create an Unsolicited Tag Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project Ry Your RS View_Project Eq System i Project Settings Channel II Scan Class im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT_RSY Channel S amp a Node MI Scan Class Tag Database i e User Accounts Activity Log Setup Cn ee N r lt ae antec 43081 A Double click Tag Database B Click New Tag Database A Tag Monitor User Accounts 42431 C Specify the properties of the tag D Click Device E Click M E 42432 F Select the name of the node that you created in Create an Unsolicited Node and click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 14 24 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network G Type the address for the tag If the controller Then type the writes the value destination address that you specified in the MSG instruction reads the value source address that you
40. address the required point as described in step F Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 2 1 1 C conveyor l Data 2 1 C startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is A in slot 2 of a rail named conveyor However the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the ACN structure LLJ rpi Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format a structure associated with the ACN module actually transfers the data start lt conveyor l Data 2 1 gt Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 LU Cy Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 13 Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network B Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software C Has this network been scheduled before If Then No From the File menu select New a N gt CO oO OmN OoorFwWwnhr From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will
41. e one of these data types DINT REAL array of DINTs or REALs user defined e less than or equal to 500 bytes If the tag does not meet these requirements reorganize the tag C From Scope select name_of_controller controller Only tags that are controller scope can produce data D Select the tag that will produce the data and press the ALT Enter keys Name Description zi Tag Type C Base Alias 1 consumers A F Consumed Data Type ee Scope name_of_controller controller 42352 E Select the Produced option button Type or select the number of controllers that will consume receive the tag G Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 5 4 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Add the Local 1756 ENBx or A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller that consumes receives the data ENET Module len Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags E Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks a MainT ask G2 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs C3 Trends Data Types CR User Defined CR Predefined CR Module Defined 3 140 Configuration lt 42376 Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to the next step no Right click 0 Configuration
42. it loses its configuration information page 1 23 e Use this option only when a BOOTP server is continually available to configure the module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 23 00 00 BC 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 4 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 42860 1 In the Relation List select the module 2 Choose Disable The status line shows that BOOTP is disabled for the module p 42892 Save the Relation List The relation list contains the configuration that you have just sent to a module You can use it as a record of the configuration of each module or to re configure the module in the future 1 From the File menu choose Save Relation List 2 Type or select a file name 3 Choose Save Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 24 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Test the Configuration 1 If you have not already done so a Connect the module to the network b Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module 2 From the Windows NT Start menu select Programs gt Command Prompt 3 Type ping IP address and press the Enter key where IP address is the IP address of the module 4 Did you receive a reply from the module If Then Yes You have a valid configuration for the module No Check your configuration 5 Close the Command Prompt window Connect Directly toa To set up communications between y
43. major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 8 6 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller A Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no gt gt Go to the next step yes output module gt Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the 1 Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of module if it loses communication the other controller with the other controller 2 Paste the module into the I O configuration of this controller 3 Go to Create Aliases stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration lt q Adda local I 0 module here x 1756 CNB x name_of_local_CNB z x 1756 CNB x name_of_remote_CNB q Adda remote 1 0 module here B Where is the module located If it is in Then same chassis as controller right click O Configuration and select New Module remote chassis right click the remote 1756 CNB module and select New Module C Select the type of module and click OK D _y Name Slot lt a E Description A Fy Comm
44. wires facing outward no connection 31304 2 Connect the battery assembly to the battery module 3 Replace the door of the battery module 4 Write on the battery label the date that you install the battery assembly EXAMPLE 8 9 02 Battery was installed on this date Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 26 6 Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module 5 Attach the label to the front of the battery module wy Allen Bradley Battery MODULE BATTERY DATE al O J 31298 Check the BAT LED 1 Turn on the chassis power RUN CO vo FORCE C RS232 BAT LED gp sar ok RUN REM PROG jn 2 Is the BAT LED off If Then Yes The battery module is correctly installed No Go to step 3 3 Check that the battery module is correctly connected to the controller 4 Check that the battery assembly is correctly connected to the battery module 5 If the BAT LED remains on install another battery assembly catalog 1756 BATA 6 If the BAT LED remains on after you complete step 5 contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Appendix A Map a PLC SLC Address When To Use This Use this procedure if you are sending a message from a PLC 5 or Procedure SLC 500 controller to a ControlLogix controller and the PLC SLC controller does not support Logical ASCII addressing To
45. 8 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller A Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no gt gt Go to the next step yes output module gt Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the 1 Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of module if it loses communication the other controller with the other controller 2 Paste the module into the I O configuration of this controller 3 Go to Create Aliases stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration lt q Adda local I 0 module here x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET x 1756 ENBx remote_ENB ENET q Adda remote 1 0 module here B Where is the module located If it is in Then same chassis as controller right click O Configuration and select New Module remote chassis right click the remote ENB or ENET module and select New Module C Select the type of module and click OK D _y Name sle A E Description H Fy Comm Format Revision EA fi H Electronic Keying Compatible Module x abs D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002
46. August 2002 9 18 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Convert the INTs to DINTs Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module B7R DNis on this rung converts the INT values from the BT module to DINT values for use in the project e The MOV instruction sets the length of the FAL instruction equal to the number of elements that the MSG reads e The FAL instruction then loads the values from B7R_int_buffer_read into BT_input This converts the values to DINTs for use in the project e BTR_index determines where in the first dimension of B7_ nputto store the values Each element of this dimension corresponds to a specific BT module BTR DN BTF_ints_to_dints 2 _7 _ AAA MOV Move Source BTR REG_LEN o Dest BTF_ints_to_dints LEN 0e File Arith Logical Control BTF_ints_to_dints Length 0e Position 0e Mode all Dest BT_input BTR_index BTR_ints_to_dints POS 0 Expression BTA_int_buffer_read BTR_ints_to_dints POS 43021 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope BTR_ints_to_dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 project controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 19 Step to the Next BT Module 1 Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module and the FAL converts it to DINTs B7R
47. BT module controller FAL Length number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length int_buffer_write array that stores the data to send to the BT module as 16 bit integers INT length name_of_ controller controller dints_output array that stores the output data that other instructions produce for the module Where length DINT length Is the name_of_controller controller number of elements to transfer 2 Enter the following rung After the FAL instruction converts the DINTs to INTs the MSG instruction sends the data in int_buffer_write to the module dints_to_ints DN heal bala Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 MSG Type Block Transfer Write gt CEND Message Control msg_write CDN gt CER gt 42463 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 11 Configure the Messages 1 In the MSG instruction click 2 Select a configuration If you want to For this item Type or select read input data Message Type Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements number of INTs to read Destination Tag int_buffer_read 0 write configuration or output data Message Type Block Transfer Write Source Tag int_buffer_write 0 Number Of Elements number of INTs to write 3 Click the Communication tab For this item Type or select Path Path to the 1771 ACN module A Click Browse B
48. CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos Write integers to a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller condition fal_control FAL 4 E CRES gt File Arith Logical CEN Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG J E 4 5 Type Unconfigured CEN Message Control message CDN gt CER gt Where dint array Is an array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int _buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 11 14 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network A In the MSG instruction click M Step 6 Configure the Message B Select a configuration for the message Table 11 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If you want to For this item Type or select CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller read receive the data Message Type Source Element
49. Channel Destination Link c CIP With Source Link Destination Node z Source ID A A 42467 3 5 1 DH 2 channel that is connected to the DH network 3 source link For a Specify local message 0 zero remote message link ID of the ControlLogix backplane local chassis 4 destination link For a Specify local message 0 zero remote message link ID of the destination network 5 in octal the DH node address of the PLC 5or SLC 500 controller Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 19 The following examples depicts a communication path over an DH network channel A DH network DH address 10 octal Message p onan O 2D I O onana D a 2 EO washer 2 8 10 1 0 where washer indicates name of the 1756 DHRIO module 2 channel A of the 1756 DHRIO module 8 10 octal address of the 1756 DHRIO module in the destination chassis 1 backplane port of the 1756 DHRIO module in the destination chassis 0 slot number of the destination controller If the message is to a PLC 5 controller SLC 500 controller G Select a cache option Then Disregard the Cache Connection check box Logix5000 controller e ControlLogix controller e FlexLogix controller How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send
50. Click Next Y Requested Packet Interval RPI ms J T Inhibit Module K J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 I In step F did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 9 J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a m le fails th ATTENTION communicatio a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic L Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E
51. ControlNet network In the following example ControlLogix chassis route messages to controllers that are on different networks EXAMPLE Route messages from a DH network ControlNet ControlNet ControlNet network ControlNet node 3 node 1 node 2 P DIC f DIC HIN ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix z lt 4 RIB backplane RIB backplane 5 0 0 channel A channel A DH node 2 DH node 3 Remote Message DH network DH network DH node 1 DH node 4 S P L c Remote Message a 5 5 0 0 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 18 2 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Configure Routing Tables In this task you configure routing tables for 1756 DHRIO modules The modules use the routing tables to send the message to the destination In the following example two ControlLogix chassis link different DH networks together via a ControlNet network EXAMPLE Routing table ControlNet ControlNet network ControlNet node 1 link ID 100 node 2 DIC DIC H N ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane RIB backplane link ID 10 link ID 30 0 0 channel A channel A DH node 2 DH node 3 DH network DH network link ID 20 link ID 40 A NS Routing table for the left 1756 DHRIO module Routing table for the right 1756 DHRIO module Backplane Lin
52. DH network between Procedure e ControlLogix controllers e ControlLogix controller and a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller ControlLogix Controller PLC 5 Controller t Fc DH Network ControlLogix Controller SLC 500 Controller 42470 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 17 2 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary steps e Configure Routing Tables e Configure a 1756 DHRIO Channel To complete this procedure do the following steps e Add a 1756 DHRIO Module e Enter a Message e Configure the Message e Stagger the Messages If a PLC 5 or an SLC 5 05 controller sends the message do the following step e Access ControlLogix Data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 3 Configure Routing Tables If a PLC 5 controller SLC 500 controller Sends a message toa Overa ControlLogix controller local network Determine if you must complete this task And there is only one ControlLogix controller in the chassis Then Go to Configure a 1756 DHRIO Channel on page 17 8 more than one ControlLogix controller in the chassis Complete this task remote network Complete this task gt ControlLogix PLC 5 controller local network yp Goto Add a 1
53. Database User Accounts Activity Log Setup mike be IW Scan Class a Tag Database Le Tag Monitor User Accounts 4 43081 B Double click Node Y Data Source Direct Driver OPC Server DDE Server D Name V Enabled Sceee SS Name gl E 42430 C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click M F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G Click Accept H Click Close Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 7 Import Logix5000 Tags To import tags from an RSLogix 5000 project into your RSView project use the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility e Create an L5K File e Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility e Use the Utility to Create a CSV File e Import the CSV File Create an L5K File A Open the RSLogix 5000 project that contains the tags that you want to access B From the File menu choose Save As Save As Savein Poets e LE Samples File name I c gt Save as type RSLogix 5000 Import Export File L5K 7 Cancel Help A 8070 C Select RSLogix 5000 Import Export File L5K D Choose Save Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 7 8 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility A Get your RSLogix 5000 software CD B On the CD find the following file language Tool
54. EN P August 2002 8 10 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlINet Network Create Aliases In this task you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I O points or channels devices As an alias for an I O point or channel each tag e provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel e represents the value of the point or channel When one changes the other reflects the change EXAMPLE o The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices Start is an alias tor the push button that is wired to point 1 ot the motor is an alias tor the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 ot module that is in slot 2 of the local chassis When the push button the module that is in slot 0 of a remote chassis named conveyor is on startis on When motor turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt Local 2 Data 0 gt lt Local 2 Data 1 gt lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt a au motor lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt Hie 42435 A From the Logic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram x Show fShow All 7j Sort Tag Name gt Alias For Base Tag Type Tag Name 42421 p Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 11 B S
55. Format Revision p fi a Electronic Keying Compatible Module z ee D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 7 F Select a Comm Format IMPORTANT If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g Listen Only Input Data If this module is a And And you want to Then select diagnostic digital input Full Diagnostics Input Data non diagnostic digital input local chassis time stamp a change in data CST Timestamped Input Data omit time stamps Inout Data remote chassis p Rack Optimization diagnostic digital output p schedule when to apply outputs Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data not schedule when to apply Full Diagnostics Output Data outputs fused digital output p schedule when to apply outputs CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data p not schedule when to apply CST Timestamped Fuse Data outputs Output Data non diagnostic and non fused local chassis schedule when to apply outputs Scheduled Output Data uigital output not schedule when to apply Output Data outputs remote chassis p Rack Optimization non isolated analog input floating point mode provides time stamp when the data is CST Timestamped Float Data
56. Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility A Get your RSLogix 5000 software CD B On the CD find the following file language Tools Tag Import Utility Logix 5000 Tag Import msi where language is the language of your software For example for software that is in English open the Enu folder C Copy the file to your computer D To install the utility open the file Use the Utility to Create a CSV File A Start the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility 43071 B Type the name of the node from Create a Polled Node C Select the L5K file D Choose Search Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 E Select the tags to import F G H Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 9 Choose OK Choose Save Type the name of the topic from Create a Polled Topic Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 14 10 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Import the CSV File A Start the Database Import amp Export wizard e Start gt Programs gt Rockwell Software RSView Studio Tools Database Import amp Export Wizard e Start gt Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSView32 Tools gt Database Import amp Export Wizard B Complete the screens of the wizard Database Import Export Wizard Import RSView CSV files or Import RSView Studio CSV files iSView Studio CSW files 4 Database Import Expor
57. Local Remote Local Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 17 22 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Table 17 D Set up for a message from a PLC 5 controller to a ControlLogix controller Continued For a remote message In this item Communication Command Specify PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address This PLC 5 starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number port through which the message exits Data Table Address Target Device Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local DH Node Octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the PLC 5 controller Local Remote Remote Remote Link Type Data Highway Remote Station Address slot number of the ControlLogix controller converted to octal Table 17 E Set up fora For a local message Remote Bridge Link ID link ID of the backplane in which the ControlLogix controller resides message from a SLC 500 controller to a ControlLogix controller In this item Communication Command Specify PLC 5 Read ot PLC5 Write Data Table Address This Controller starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Chan
58. MSG instruction click 2 Select a configuration If you want to For this item Type or select read input data Message Type Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements number of INTs to read Destination Tag int buffer read 0 write configuration or output data Message Type Block Transfer Write Source Tag int buffer write 0 Number Of Elements number of INTs to write 3 Click the Communication tab 4 Click Browse 5 Select the RIO MODULE and click OK 6 How many devices require block transfer instructions If Then 16 or less devices Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked more than 16 devices A Select 16 devices that require the most frequent updates B Is this message to one of those devices If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box 7 Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 15 Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules Input data from the first BT module Input data from the next BT module Use this procedure to program a single MSG instruction to read data from multiple block transfer modules The following diagram shows the flow of data for a block transfer read The block transfer write sequence works in the opposite order
59. Master Controller for 7 you are using this polling mode Then Standard Polling standard Complete this step message based Go to Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling A Open the RSLogix 5000 project a Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags lt __ CI Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler H S Tasks 4 88 MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine CI Unscheduled Programs 42376 B Create the following tags Scope Name Data Type controller list _priority_poll DINT x where x is 2 plus the number of stations that you will poll more frequently than other stations For example if you want to poll 5 stations more frequently create an array of 7 elements controller list_normal_poll DINT x where x is 2 plus the remaining number of stations The stations that you did not include in list priority poll controller list_active_stations BOOL 256 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 22 4 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 ey Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler H S Tasks tal MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs oo Qo Right click Controller name_of_controller and select Properti
60. Messages From a DH Network Configure a PLC 5 or SLC 500 Message Mlavae hin This procedure uses RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software revision 3 x A Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software as required open the project for the controller that sends the message B If a SLC 500 controller sends the message in the MSG instruction specify the following For this For a message to a Select Target Device SLC 500 controller 500CPU PLC 5 controller PLCS Local Remote gt Remote C Display the set up screen for the message Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 a PLC 5 controller Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network 18 7 D Select a set up For a message from In this item Communication Command Specify PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address This PLC 5 starting address of the data in the controller that sends the message Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number port through which the message exits Data Table Address Target Device starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message Local DH Node Octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the controller that sends the message Local Remote Remote Remote Link Type Data Highway Remote Station Address node number of the controller that receives the message
61. No Standard multiple message transfer per node scan Yes Standard single message transfer per node scan Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 22 6 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications R Determine when the master controller should send its messages To send messages to slave stations Select before polling the next station Between station polls when the station number of the master appears in In polling sequence the polling lists S Select the list normal poll tag step B T After polling the priority stations how many normal stations do you want to poll If Then all Leave the default of 0 not all Type the number to poll before returning to the priority stations U Select the list priority poll tag step B V Select the list_active stations tag step B W Click OK Sion Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags lt 4 H _ _ CI Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler H S Tasks 4 88 MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 4237 X Double click Controller Tags Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 7 Y Inthe list priority poll tag step B enter the addresses of the priority stations to poll e If this controller master sends its messages in the polling sequence step R include this controller in the list e Ente
62. Select PanelView and click OK C _y Name Node me D Description a E gt Comm Format Data 32 INT Revision po fi 4 Electronic Keying Compatible Module a F 42400 C Type a name for the PanelView terminal D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the terminal E Does the terminal read more than 8 words of scheduled data 16 bit integers or write more than 8 words of scheduled data If Then select up to 8 Data 8 INT more than 8 Data 32 INT EXAMPLE Select a Comm Format If the PanelView terminal writes e 45 time critical bits 45 16 3 integers e 4 time critical integers Then the terminal writes 7 time critical integers so select Data 8 INT F How closely must the PanelView terminal match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 13 6 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network G Click Next H Requested Packet Interval RPI ms I e J Inhibit Module J lt J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 H Type the rate that you want scheduled data to transfer with the PanelView terminal e Use a power of two time the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5ms type a ra
63. Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 17 Table 17 C Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data wr
64. Unspecitied gt Description 4 Name i m Address Host Name 5 Slot 2 faa Revision Reo 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 t 42579 6 4 Type a name for the module 5 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 6 How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying 7 Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 8 Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 5 Add the PanelView You can establish up to eight connections instances with each T inal PanelView terminal For example one controller can use all eight ermina instances Or eight controllers can each use one instance Each PanelView instance gives you e 100 DINTs of input data e 100 DINTs of output data For eac
65. a Module Using RSLogix 5000 Software 1 7 Connect the Hardware onanan aaa 1 7 Connect to the Module nnana aaau aaa 1 8 Configure the Port cet vrais dav aaae 1 10 Check the Module sira nss imora See ke AAE a E a 1 12 Configure a Module Using RSLinx Software 1 13 Connect the Hardware bw Fe el eG Si eS wey wes 1 13 Configure the Porte Ado eS bE ae hee tee 1 13 Check the WOGUIe y s 640 24 Wr ag a bed end ba Ee a a Bo 1 15 Configure a Module Using BOOTP 1 16 Install BOOTPServer Software 0 000005 1 16 Connect the Hatd ware iano ho Sexes eee ace 1 16 Enter the Default Network Settings 1 17 Configure the Module ho ai ge sin s Rae Bee SP cee cle Ged sae p ipcak 4 1 18 Disable BOOTP srra aa ee Rsk Re a a 1 19 Save the Relation List nnana tot Ooo ees aoe Ok 1 19 Renew the IP Address of a 1794 AENx Module 1 20 Install BOOTPServer Software 000 1 20 Set Up the Hardware nannaa SN eV eee Re Ek Ree 1 20 Enter the New Configuration 004 1 21 Send the Configuration onasan 84S ceeds cue tates 1 22 Disable DOO LP hase nie ey Mk eta a EE AR Re ees 1 22 Save the Relation List 244 4 2 5 3 BS wos BS 1 23 Test the COMmieuranonicd gt and ea ees ee tbe et Re males 1 24 Connect Directly to a Controller o n bea be ee ees 1 24 Connect a Seal Caples Gide utes Yew Cue ae a ule 1 24 Configure a Serial Driver n on anaana Site ai
66. amp Allen Bradley ControlLogix System 1756 L1 L1Mx L55Mxx L63 User Manual _ E a A m Rockwell Automation Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of these products must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards In no event will Rockwell Automation be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resulting from the use or application of these products Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Rockwell Automation office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this
67. and Memory Use Reference Manual publication number 1756 RMO087 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 B 2 Estimate Execution Time Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Appendix C Estimate Memory Use This manual no longer contains information on the memory used for data conversions instructions and array indexes For this information see the Logix5000 Controllers Execution Time and Memory Use Reference Manual publication number 1756 RM087 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 C 2 Estimate Memory Use Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Appendix D Determine When Data Is Updated ControlLogix controllers update date asynchronous with the execution of logic Use the following flowchart to determine when a producer controller input module or bridge module will send data input or output data output p gt analog or digital digital input analog analog or digital digital l remote or local analog COS for any point on the No remote No module p ql RTS lt RPI Yes local Yes Data is sent to the backplane Data is sent to the backplane at at the RTS the RTS and RPI a Y Data is sent to the backplane at the RPI a and at the change of a specified point Data is sent to the backplane at the t RPI e Over a ControlNet net
68. and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 5 D Name m Address Host Name Description z C P Address H Host Name lt Unspecitied gt E Slot 2 Revision 2 fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module i 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 5 6 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 1 0 Configuration
69. controller F In the ControlLogix controller is the data scheduled or unscheduled If Then scheduled Click the Scheduled button unscheduled 1 Click the Unscheduled button 2 From the Node Name list select the controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 15 G Specify the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller If the tag is And its data And the Specify type Is scheduled bit PanelView writes the data SI0O x y PanelView reads the data SO0 x y INT PanelView writes the data SI0O x PanelView reads the data SO0 x unscheduled bit j tag_name z INT name of INT or REAL tag that stores the data in the REAL ControlLogix controller Where Is x element of the PanelView input or output structure in the controller y bit number 0 to 15 within the input or output element tag name name of the tag that you created in the controller to exchange bits with the PanelView terminal Zz bit number 0 to 15 EXAMPLE Specify the address of a tag in the ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller PanelView Application name_of_panelview 1 Data 0 1 10 0 1 name_of_panelview 0 Data 3 00 3 station_1_status 3 station_1_status 3 pv_write_1 H Click OK I Click OK pv_write_1 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 13 16 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a Cont
70. controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module To make it easier to test a system one module or section at a time 1 Initially inhibit all the modules 2 To test a section of the system clear the check boxes for the modules of that section G e uninhibit the modules H If communication fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a modules fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic I Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 11 12 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 5 Entera Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 4 6 Message o CEND e Message Control M F CDND e A CER gt e e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions
71. done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step e Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems To complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 2 Select a Polling Mode e Step 3 Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling e Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling e Step 5 Configure a Slave Controller e Step 6 Enter a Message e Step 7 Configure the Message e Step 8 Stagger the Messages For additional information see SCADA System Application Guide publication AG 6 5 8 A Using the following Allen Bradley cable connect each controller to the modem A B 1784 CAS 25 pin male modem connector The cable has the following wiring controller modem 9 pin female 25 pin male DCD 1 a 8 RXD 2 a 3 TXD 3 gt 2 DTR 4 gt 20 COMMON 5 7 DSR 6 a 6 RTS 7 gt 4 CTS 8 lt 5 B Configure the modems Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 3 Step 2 Selecta Polling Determine if you will use standard polling or message based polling Mode If Then go to On page data is time critical Step 3 Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling 22 3 slave controllers will initiate messages you want to use logic to control when communication Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling 22 8 occurs Step 3 Configure the Determine if you must complete this step
72. e server is not running Ifa MSG instruction reads or writes the value you will see error until the controller sends the message for the first time Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 8 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control devices that are wired to 1756 I O dules Procedure eat e local modules e remote modules where 1756 CNB modules connect the local and remote chassis over a ControlNet network Controller Local 0 Remote 1 0 A 6 e je a 4 ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 CNB Modules ControlNet Network Ret leg we ei ae How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure do the following steps IMPORTANT If the all the I O modules are in the same chassis as the controller no remote I O go to Add I O Modules on page 8 6 e Add the Local 1756 CNB Module e Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module e Add I O Modules e Create Aliases e Schedule the ControlNet Network e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 8 2 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Add the Local 1756 CNB Module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline en Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Ha
73. iew Project Ry Your RS View_Project Eq System i Project Settings Channel II Scan Class im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT_RSY Channel S amp a Node MI Scan Class Tag Database i e User Accounts Activity Log Setup Cn ee N r lt ae antec 43081 A Double click Tag Database B Click New Tag Database A Tag Monitor User Accounts 42431 C Specify the properties of the tag D Click Device E Click M E 42432 F Select the name of the node that you created in Create an Unsolicited Node and click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 7 24 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network G Type the address for the tag If the controller Then type the writes the value destination address that you specified in the MSG instruction reads the value source address that you specified in the MSG instruction H Click Accept Validate an RSView32 Tag This procedure applies only to RSView32 projects A On the Edit Mode tab double click Tag Monitor Tag Name Value State t B Type the name of the RSView tag and press the Enter key Tag Name Value State tag_name C What does the State column display If Then valid The tag contains a valid value from the controller error There is a communication problem such as the e controller is not available
74. if you must complete this task Channel If a Sends a message to a Over a And there is Then PLC 5 controller ControlLogix controller local network only one ControlLogix Complete this task SLC 500 controller controller in the chassis more than one ControlLogix Go to Access ControlLogix Data controller in the chassis on page 17 20 remote network gt Go to Access ControlLogix Data on page 17 20 ControlLogix gt gt yp Goto Add a 1756 DHRIO controller Module on page 17 11 In the following example a 1756 DHRIO module automatically sends messages to a controller EXAMPLE Route a local message The 1756 DHRIO module automatically routes any local messages that it receives over Channel A to the controller that is in slot 2 A DICIS HINIS R B 5 channel A 0 DH node 2 DH network Local Message P L C 5 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 9 A Install the 1756 DHRIO module B Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation For example perform one of the following e Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756 DHRIO module e Connect the chassis to an EtherNet IP or ControlNet network C Power up the chassis D Start RSLinx software
75. information on the SSV instruction see the following publications e Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756 RM003 e ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 Handle Motion Faults Two types of motion faults exist Type Description Example A Motion Axis Move MAM instruction with a parameter out of range Errors e Do not impact controller operation e Should be correct to optimize execution time and ensure program accuracy Minor Major e Caused by a problem with the servo loop exceeded the e Can shutdown the controller if you PositionErrorTolerance do not correct the fault condition value The application You can configure a fault as either minor or major by using the Axis Wizard Group window Understanding errors Executing a motion instruction within an application program can generate errors The MOTION_INSTRUCTION tag has a field that contains the error code For more information about error codes for individual instructions see the Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756 RM007 Understanding minor major faults Several faults can occur that are not caused by motion instructions For example a loss of encoder feedback or an actual position exceeding an overtravel limit will cause faults The motion faults are considered type 2 faults with error codes from 1 to 32 See Logix5000 Controllers C
76. instructions load the appropriate configuration properties into the MSG instruction so it can read the next BT module The configuration properties load from the B7R_cfg array e After each MSG a subsequent rung increments the B7R_index tag This loads the configuration properties for the next module into the MSG instruction before it executes again BTR EN MOV 1 H Move Source BTR_cfo BTR_index REQ_LEN 0 Dest BTR REQ_LEN pe MOY Move Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Rack s 000 Dest BTR Rack 8 O00 MOY Move Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Slot 0 Dest BTR Slot pe Type Block Transfer Read Message Control BTR i MOY Move Source BTR_cfg BTR_index Channel p Dest BTR Channel B e MOY Move Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Group 0 Dest BTR Group De COP Copy File Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Path Dest BTR Path Length 1 MSG 17 43014 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 20 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 2 Right click each undefined tag select New name and assign the following properties Name Description Data Type Scope BIR block transfer message that reads data from MESSAGE name_of_controller each BT module controller BTR_cfg array of configuration properties for each BT BT_CONFIGURATION name of controller module number controller BTR_index controls which BT module that the MSG DINT name_of_controller instruction reads controller Where Is the number nu
77. life e replace the battery The following information was removed from this manual e Estimate Execution Time e Estimate Memory Use You can find this information in Logix5000 Controllers Execution Time and Memory Use Reference Manual publication 1756 RM087 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Summary of Changes 2 Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Preface Purpose of this Manual This manual guides the development of projects for ControlLogix controllers It provides step by step procedures on how to establish communications e over the following networks EtherNet IP ControlNet remote I O _pue DH 485 serial e with the following devices controllers I O workstations TM PanelView terminals This manual works together with the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 which covers the following tasks e Manage project files e Organize your logic e Organize tags e Program routines e Test a project e Handle faults Who Should Use this This manual is intended for those individuals who program Manual applications that use ControlLogix controllers such as e software engineers e control engineers e application engineers e instrumentation technicians Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Preface 2 When to Use this Manual Use this manual e when you are ready to integrate your application with
78. messages to If Then 16 or less Logix5000 Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked controllers more than 16 Logix5000 1 Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the most frequent controllers messages 2 Is this message to one of those controllers If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box H Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 17 20 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Access ControlLogix Data Complete this task for any message that a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over a DH network If the contr
79. not part of a structure or name_of panelview I Data x y array PanelView reads the data Convert the tag to an alias for name_of panelview 0O Data x y PanelView writes the data Move name of panelview I Data z tothe p a tag DINT Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 PanelView reads the data Where name_of_panelview Move the tag to name_of_panelview 0O Data z Is name of the PanelView terminal in the I O configuration of the controller x element of the PanelView terminal input I or output 0 structure You can use this element for up to 16 bits y bit number 0 to 15 within the input or output element Z unique element of the PanelView terminal input I or output 0 structure Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 9 EXAMPLE Organize scheduled e time critical data Copies the value of name_of_panelview I Data O 1 to station_1_stop name_of_panelview Data 0 1 station_1 stop AE Cy JE Copies the value of station_1_run to name_of_panelview O Data Oj 0 station_1 run name_of_panelview O Data 0 0 Hp EN IE C gt alarm_ack and alarm are aliases for data that the PanelView terminal writes and reads alarm_ack alarm lt name_of_panelview l Data 0 2 gt lt name_of_panelview O Data 0 1 gt FE CU Moves name_of_panelview I Data 3 to counter PRE a DINT tag and moves counter ACC a DINT tag to name_of_panelvi
80. of the software the menu option is Create tag_name From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK e condition E MSG e 4 FE 4 E Type Unconfigured e Message Control message M7 e e Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 13 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller condition message EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 H CRES File Arith Logical
81. or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as N7 0 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element logical address such as N7 0 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse 2 address where logical address such as F8 0 Click the Communication tab Select the ENB or ENET and click OK In the Path text box add address is the IP address or DNS name of the workstation EXAMPLE Complete path entry washer_chassis 2 130 130 128 4 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 21 G On the Communication tab specify the following parameters Fo
82. procedure uses RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software revision 3 x A Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software as required open the project for the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller B If the message is from a SLC 5 05 controller in the MSG instruction select PLCS MSG Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Read Target Device PLCS __ Local Remote Local Control Block N7 0 Control Block Length 93 Setup Screen 42474 C Display the set up screen for the message D Specify the following parameters If the controller For this section And this item Specify is a PLC 5 This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count MultiHop Select Yes SLC 500 This Controller Communication Command PLCS Read ot PLCS Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Target Device Data Table Address Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count MultiHop Select Yes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 5 2
83. select New Module 2 Select RIO MODULE and click OK 4 oc gt Name Description H Parent Rack adapter_name 1 4 1 4 Rack 21 0 Groups Group H Slot 4 42442 3 Type a name for the module 4 Type or select the group number of the module 5 Type or select the slot number that the module is in 6 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Read or Write Data To or Use this procedure to transfer data to or from a module that requires From a Block Transfer block transfers Q Block Transfer Read Data froma Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Word 1 int_buffer_read 0 dints_input 0 Word 2 int_buffer_read 1 dints_input 1 Word 3 int_buffer_read 2 dints_input 2 1 The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs 2 An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs D 2 Block Transfer Write DINTs fromthe Buffer of INTs Data fora BT project module dints_output 0 int_buffer_write 0 Word 1 dints_output 1 int_buffer_write 1 Word 2 dints_output 2 int_buffer_write 2 Word 3 1 An F
84. the CSV File sg be cash od ae Ge diel GE RV 14 10 Create a Polled Tags jut tie wit ah Od ok COG ee Bes 14 12 Create a Unsolicited Topics Sy aii Gta a cowed Kees 14 14 Add the 1756 CNB Module sienna aa 4 eka eA eens 14 16 Entet a Messa naana dot cio ened Pend Cee Gs od PI Mule end et 14 18 Configure the Message nnana Ga whew eee oes 14 20 Create an Unsolicited Node nanana aaa 14 22 Create an Unsolicited Tag o n aaau aa 14 23 Validate an RSView32 Tag noaua aaa 14 24 Chapter 15 When To Use This Procedure ex 4g 4 ine vos ee RSE SR BES 15 1 Monitor a Connection stesao ey ao 9 eh aa es Eke ns 15 2 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Table of Contents vi Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 16 When to Use This PLOCedite 2vaiionris wend eden a 16 1 How to Use This Procedures gt s7 36 4 4s4siese othe eS os 16 1 Step 1 Add the 1756 DNB Module 16 1 St p 2 Create Aliases ce i ivy cals inch kd gh dos ae eas BA a 16 4 Step 3 Set the Scanner to Run Modes veda ea tee 2s 16 6 Chapter 17 When to Use This Procedure 4 4 0 5 scaer4 db eels 4 17 1 How to Use This Procedure Gy aleuhvw Sed oY esas 17 2 Co
85. the I 0 devices controllers and networks in your system e after you perform these actions develop the basic code for your application perform isolated tests of your application How to Use this Manual This manual is divided into the basic tasks that you perform while programming a ControlLogix controller e Each chapter covers a task e The tasks are organized in the sequence that you will typically perform them As you use this manual you will see some terms that are formatted differently from the rest of the text Text that is Identifies For example Means Italic the actual name of an item that you Right click User Defined Right click on the item that is named see on your screen or in an example User Defined courier information that you must supply Right click You must identify the specific program in based on your application a name of _ program your application Typically it is a name or variable variable that you have defined Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network Table of Contents Chapter 1 When to Use This Procedites ys ae kg Pak pee eee 1 1 Before You BEGIN a aaau aana hn aE Ga he Panes 1 2 RSLogix 5000 Software ce Gracies we heed a 1 3 RSLAS SOL Wale Seat cada eee EK ee ee es 1 4 BOOTP Server Software Bia thot Poe a a 1 5 How to Use This Prodedtier va Geu eres dat ned Sea ea 1 6 Configure
86. the Master Controller for Standard Polling 22 3 Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based POA vce aby Aled Oe Biden a 44 Gta ee MER Wee hans 22 8 Step 5 Configure a Slave Controller o of pe eh ne 22 10 Step 6 Enter a Messages 4g Yee 2G ba veal Ae a oes 22 12 Step 7 Configure the Message 444 4 3 0 pos ale eee es 22 14 Step 8 Stagger the Messages 0000000005 22 17 Chapter 23 When to Use this Procedure soi se esawirs Bate aoa 23 1 How to Use This Procedure ho a Pale Po8 Kee ee EOS 23 1 Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems 23 2 Step 2 Configure the Serial Port of the Controller 23 3 Step 3 Dial the Other Controller n n cea Pe Ree 23 5 Step 4 Send the Message ocd aa ieee oe eed eed 2S 23 6 Step 5 Configure the Message nnana ele tba Kesey acaes 23 8 Step 6 Hang Up ll Md Wey A in ear ace 23 11 Step 7 Stagger the Messages ee By SS ES EEO AY 23 12 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Table of Contents viii Program Motion Control Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 24 When to Use This Procedure nanana aaaea 24 1 How to Use This Procedure onnaa aaa 24 2 Select a CST Master Device 24 eK cies ode aaa 24 2 Define the Controller as the CST Master 24 3 Define a 1756 SYNCH Module as the CST Master 24 3 Add the Motion Module
87. the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 4 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network H t f Inhibit Module t J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic
88. 0 battery label 41025 F Attach the battery label 1 Write on the battery label the date you install the battery 2 Attach the label to the inside of the controller door G Dispose the old battery according to state and local regulations ATTENTION Do not incinerate or dispose lithium batteries in general trash collection They may explode or rupture violently Follow state and local regulations for disposal of these materials You are legally responsible for hazards created while your battery is being disposed Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 25 6 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 26 Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module When to Use This ore ise to ensure that the hanes a battery module has sufficient capacity to maintain the memory of the Procedure controller Use the 1756 BATM battery module with any ControlLogix5555 or ControlLogix5563 controller The battery module is highly recommended for the higher memory controllers O controller battery module is r ae 1756 L55M12 Bw permitted 1756 L55M13 p gt permitted TO 1756 L55M14 p gt highly recommended L A bee f 1756 L55M16 highly recommended o 31298 1756 L55M22 stored in nonvolatile memory not required but permitted not st
89. 0 000 0 cece eens 24 4 1756 MO8SE Add the SERCOS Drive 24 7 Create a Motion Group 4 oe ca na a 24 9 Assign the Properties of the Motion Group 24 10 SOME SIGS thE AKS oO aane oh wee aee aei ES 24 12 Display the Properties for the Axis 24 12 Select an Axis Configuration 2 50143 e0 gta ae ah eoies 24 12 Assign Units for Measurements 24 13 Assign a Conversion Constant 00 24 13 1756 MO2AE Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive 24 14 1756 MO8SE Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier 24 15 1756 MO8SE Select the Motor and Feedback 24 16 Run Hookup Test ge Sok ogee Ge Ud hh oe Bae hd ee es 24 17 Download Your Project and Go Online 24 17 Display the Properties for the Axis 24 18 Complete the Hookup Tests oona Fee Pana gale aust 24 18 Develop Logic for Motion Control 00 24 19 Handle Motion Faults f n a5 nae ies Reenter Pa 24 20 Chapter 25 When to Use This Procediive lt pasas4 Site lt setesee5 33 25 1 How to Use This Procedite lt 4 vein iy See Poe hee AS 25 1 Estimate Battery Life iss catty whe ke 8 ota ae ke go 25 1 Store Replacement Batteries 44 Vek eee RS Pee 25 4 Replace a Battery nonna See ehcp amp Ra an ae aed 25 4 Chapter 26 When to Use This Procedures ui c euiew as nde ka whee ed 26 1 How to Use This Procedtt eng vaca dees Cee Sete 26 1 Estimate Battery Life
90. 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller A Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no gt gt Go to the next step yes output module gt Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the 1 Copy the module from the I O configuration of module if it loses communication the other controller with the other controller 2 Paste the module into the I O configuration of this controller 3 Go to Create Aliases stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration x 1756 CNB x name_of_local_CNB 21794 ACN x name_of_rail q Adda 1794 1 0 module here B Right click the 1794 ACN module and select New Module C Select the type of module and click OK D _y Name Slot lt E Description gt Fy Comm Format x Revision ER i H Electronic Keying Compatible Module x ne D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 7 F Select a Comm Format IMPORTANT If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g List
91. 00000 HOOGOOGOOGOOOGOGO 3003000000000000 I STOSOSSSSSSSSSSSOSAI o switch 42872 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 4 2 Communicate with 1794 I O Over an EtherNet IP Network Before You Use This Before you use this procedure do the following Procedure 1 To communicate with I O modules over an EtherNet IP network you must use a 1756 ENBx or ENET B module in the local chassis If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the following modules e ENB or ENET module in the local chassis e AEN module Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step e Add the local 1756 ENBx or ENET module To complete this procedure do the following steps e Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module e Add I O Modules e Address I O To check your work do the following step e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 3 Add the local 1756 ENBx or 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 pr
92. 001E EN P August 2002 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element name where name isthe first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 15 Table 22 B Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller sc
93. 01E EN P August 2002 9 6 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network H Requested Packet Interval RPI ms I e JT Inhibit Module J J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode ini H Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc I Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box J If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic K Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 7 Read or Write Data To or Use this procedure to transfer data to or from a module that requires From a Block Tran
94. 0300 16 03FF r gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 27 Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 e Program a message to communicate with multiple devices Refer to Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules on page 9 12 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 9 28 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 10 Communicate with 1794
95. 0300 16 03FF r a 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Does Another Controller Multiple controllers can consume a produced tag i Require the Data m Then another controller requires the same data Go to Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module on page 5 4 no other controller requires the data You are done Skip the rest of this procedure Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 5 14 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Add the Local 1756 ENBx or A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the ControlLogix controller that sends the message ENET Module i a Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags E Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks a MainT ask G2 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs C3 Trends Data Types CR User Defined CR Predefined CR Module Defined 3 140 Configuration lt 42376 Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to Enter a Message no Right click 0 Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Ano
96. 037 LA Clear Dest BTW_index 0e 43037 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 26 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Address 1 0 To monitor or control an I O device assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic e For step by step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 e All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope As you assign addresses click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I O tags e Use the following table to select the address of an I O device If the device is Then use this address digital name type Data group bit analog element of the array that stores the data for or from this device Where Is name name of the remote 1 0 adapter such as the 1771 ASB module e Use the name for the rack that contains the module to which this device is wired e Use the name from the 1 0 configuration of the controller type type of device If Then input l output 0 group group number of the module to which this device is wired bit point bit number to which this device is wired Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 27 EXAMPLE Address a digital device that is wired to a 1771 I O module 1 0 Configuration 5 1756 DHRIO B Local_DHRIO B lt 0040
97. 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are wired Procedure to 1794 I O modules when a e 1756 CNB module connects the local chassis to a ControlNet network e 1794 ACN adapter connects the 1794 I O modules to the same ControlNet network CELLEN olelsioieteletetereleleieiere 5000 eect 555555 5555555555555005 F Sa 3 a Sia ControlNet network a How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step e Add the local 1756 CNB module To complete this procedure do the following steps e Add the Remote 1794 ACN Module e Add I O Modules e Create Aliases e Schedule the ControlNet Network To check your work do the following step e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 10 2 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Add the local 1756 CNB module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline en Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler Tasks MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends 3 6 Data Types i User Defined Predefined CR Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration lt q 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and
98. 1 gt 17771 ASB Remote_Rack_4 input device group 2 bit 0 adapter module for rack number 4 Remote_Rack_4 I Data 2 0 Sie ays EE BE LL pi 4243E Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 28 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A O Gohhguraton 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 e F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Pub
99. 1756 ENBx Backplane 1756 Ax xx 1756 Lx F Select the ControlLogix controller G Choose Apply and confirm the update H Click the Data Collection tab Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 5 _ DataSource Data Collection Advanced Communication Processor Type ogix5000 Data Collection Mode IV Polled Messages mSec 1000 lt I Type the update I Unsolicited Messages rate ms for the J Gache Unsolicited Date data J Sendlellitnsalicited updates Communications Time Out Secs 20 J Click the Use Use Symbols 5 Symbols check box IV Limit Maximum Packets 20 42429 5 hie Select Tag Name Database 24 xX Look in a Projects 7 c Samples Your _ASLogis5000_Project File name K Files of type SR Ea a aani ATena K Select RSLogix 5000 acd L Select the RSLogix 5000 project for this topic M Choose Open N Choose Done and then Yes Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 7 6 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create a Polled Node A Open the RSView project im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project i x Your ASView_Project B System Project Settings i Channel E Channel de Node q B Node AM Scan Class Tag
100. 19 1 Ethernet network 5 1 configure 1756 ENBx or ENET module 1 1 1794 AENx module 1 1 connection monitor 15 1 troubleshoot 3 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 13 1 controller battery life 1756 BA1 25 1 1756 BATA battery assembly 26 1 1756 BATM battery module 26 1 ControlNet network communicate with a PanelView terminal 13 1 communicate with an RSView32 project 14 1 determine when data is updated D 1 send a message over a 11 1 D DeviceNet network 16 1 DF1 dial up 23 1 master and slave communications 22 1 workstation 21 1 DH network 17 1 18 1 DH 485 19 1 dial up communications 23 1 domain name assign 1 1 E Establish Serial Communications with the Controller 21 1 Estimate Execution Time B 1 estimating memory use C 1 Ethernet driver 2 1 Ethernet network assign IP address 1 1 communicate with a PanelView terminal 6 1 communicate with an RSView32 project 7 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 2 Index configure a 1756 ENBx or ENET module 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 configure a 1794 AENx module 1 1 configure an Ethernet driver 2 1 determine when data is updated D 1 program over an 2 1 send a message 5 1 execution time B 1 F fault module 15 1 FlexLogix controller ControlNet network 11 1 DF1 network 22 1 DH 485 network 19 1 1 0 1747 20 1 1756 3 1 8 1 1771 9 1 20 1 1791 20 1 1794 4 1 10 1 20 1 determine when data is updated D 1 DeviceNet 16 1 fault 15 1 instruction execution time B 1 memory us
101. 255 0 130 130 130 50 Delete Enable Disable Renew Add 42860 2 Choose New Ethernet Address Macy q 3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 4 4 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 q 5 Gateway 0 0 0 0 a 6 Cancel 3 Type the Ethernet address of the module e g 00 00 BC 06 00 6A 42891 4 Type the IP address for the module 5 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 6 Type the gateway address for the module if you need one 7 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1 22 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Send the Configuration Relation List hit Ethernet Address MAC _IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Delete 00 00 BC 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 Enable 1 o Disable Add Renew 42860 1 In the Relation List select the module 2 Choose Renew Status The software resets the module and sends the new IP address ys Sent 130 130 130 18 to Ethernet address 00 00 B0 03 62 37 42860 Disable BOOTP Each time you turn on the module what do you want it to do If you want the module to Then Notes Use the same configuration Go to step 1 This disables BOOTP for the module It no longer requests a configuration from BOOTP servers Request a configuration froma BOOTP Go to Save the e This leaves BOOTP enabled for the module When you turn off server Relation List on the module
102. 3 Connect the RS 485 port to the DH 485 network B Connect the serial port of the ControlLogix controller to either port 1 or port 2 of the AIC If you connect to this port Over this distance Use this cable port 1 lt 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL AC00 DB 9 RS 232 DTE connection 545 em 17 7 in 1756 CP3 port 2 lt 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL APOO mini DIN 8 RS 232 connection 5 45 em 177 in 1761 CBL PMO2 For additional information see AIC Advanced Interface Converter User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 19 4 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 2 Configure the Serial Port ni Bf Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks 3 8 MainT ask 5 68 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs oo A Right click Controller name_of_controller and select Properties B Click the Serial Port tab Major Faults Minor Faults l Date and Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol C gt Mode Show Wiline values D gt Baud Rate 19200 x 42587 C Select System default D Select 19200 E Click Apply F Click the System Protocol tab Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 5 Major Faults Min
103. 4 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network E Click the MultiHop tab To Address Type To Address This PLCS 1756 ENet I P str q F ControlLogix Backplane a 1756 Backplane Slot dec a 42425 F Type the IP address of the ENB or ENET module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller G Type the slot number of the ControlLogix controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 6 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to exchange data between a PanelView terminal Procedure and a ControlLogix controller over a EtherNet IP network 88888388 42817 switch Before You Begin Before you use this procedure do the following 1 To produce and consume tags over an EtherNet IP network you must use a 1756 ENBx or ENET B module If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the ENB or ENET module in the local chassis Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN
104. 56 L55M23 1756 L55M24 Use the values for the 1756 L55M14 controller 1756 L63 60 C 98 days 204 days 11 104 days WC 146 days 268 days 5 157 days acc 105 days 222 days 6 113 days Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 26 4 Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module Replace a Battery To replace the 1756 BATA battery assembly Assembly e Remove the Existing Battery Assembly e Install a New Battery Assembly e Check the BAT LED Remove the Existing Battery Assembly WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 1 Remove the door of the battery module ee y Allen Bradley sattery mopuLe 2 Disconnect the battery assembly from the battery module pf Q 31304 3 Remove the battery assembly from the battery module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module 26 5 Install a New Battery Assembly ATTENTION Only install a 1756 BATA battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller 1 Put the new battery assembly into the battery module with the
105. 56 M08SE Add the SERCOS Drive Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types 1 0 Configuration x 1756 M08SE_ lt __ ___ L Right click and select New Module 2 Select the SERCOS drive and choose OK 3 Name Node f 4 4 Z Revision fi i Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 lt 5 43018 Description 3 Type a name for the drive 4 Type or select the node number of the drive If this is a multi axis drive select the node number of the first axis 5 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 6 Choose Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 8 Program Motion Control Node 1 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 8 Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 7 lt none gt 10 11 12 13 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a module fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce
106. 69 ctrl J LF 10 I 0A 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A ctrl K VT 11 0B 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B ctrl L FF 12 0C 44 2C L 76 4C l 108 6C ctrl M CR 13 r 0D 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D ctrl N SO 14 0E 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E ctrl O SI 15 OF 47 2F 0 79 4F 0 111 6F ctrl P DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70 ctrl Q DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 ctrl R DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72 ctrl S DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 S 115 73 ctrl T DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 ctrl U NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 ctrl V SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 V 118 76 ctrl W ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 Ww 119 77 ctrl X CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 X 120 78 ctrl Y EM_ 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79 ctrl Z SUB 26 1A 58 3A Z 90 5A Z 122 7A ctrl ESC 27 1B 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B ctrl FS 28 1C lt 60 3C 92 5C 124 7C ctrl GS 29 1D 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D ctrl RS 30 1E gt 62 3E i 94 5E 126 E ctrl JUS 31 1F 63 3F 95 5F DEL 127 7F Rockwell Automation For technical assistance call a Rockwell A representative or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following Support ways Phone United 1 440 646 5800 States Canada Outside United You can access the phone number for your States Canada country via the Internet 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com 3 Unde
107. 756 DHRIO controller SLC 500 controller Module on page 17 11 remote network gt Complete this task ControlLogix controller gt yp Goto Add a 1756 DHRIO Module on page 17 11 The following example shows a local message and a remote message from a PLC 5 controller Any type of network can link the ControlLogix chassis EXAMPLE Local and remote messages ControlNet network W2aqa ooo ot Remote Message DICIS HINIS RIBIS 0 0 DH network Local p Message 5 In this task you configure routing tables for 1756 DHRIO modules The modules use the routing tables to send the message to the destination Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 17 4 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network In the following example two ControlLogix chassis link different DH networks together via a ControlNet network EXAMPLE Routing table ControlNet ControlNet network ControlNet node 1 link ID 100 node 2 DIC DIC f HIN ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane RIB backplane link ID 10 link ID 30 0 0 channel A channel A DH node 2 DH node 3 DH network DH network link ID 20 link ID 40 NS ZNZ Routing table for the left 1756 DHRIO module Routing table for the right 1756 DHRIO module E Backplane Link 10 E Backplane Link 30 1756 D
108. 756 RMO07 Each motion instruction has an operand named Motion control This field uses a MOTION_INSTRUCTION tag to store status information during the execution of motion instructions This status information can include instruction status errors etc MSO Motion Servo On l The Axis DN Motion control ee Motion control ER operand ATTENTION Tags used for the motion control operand of motion instruction should only be used once Re use of the same motion control operand in other instructions can cause unintended operation of the control variables For more information about the MOTION_INSTRUCTION tag refer to the appropriate motion instruction in the Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756 RM007 You can read motion status and configuration parameters in your logic using two methods Method Example Directly accessing the MOTION_GROUP e Axis faults and AXIS structures e Motion status Using the GSV instruction Actual position Enable the Auto Tag Update attribute fora CommandAcceleration motion group Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 20 Program Motion Control Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 In your ladder logic program you can modify motion configuration parameters using the SSV instruction For example you can change position loop gain velocity loop gain and current limits within your program For more
109. AL instruction converts the 32 bit integers DINTs from the Logix5000 controller to 16 bit integers INTs e Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs e The instruction stores the data in a temporary array of INTs 2 The MSG instruction writes the INTs from the temporary array to BT module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 11 Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung Reads 16 bit integers INTs from the module and stores them in int_buffer_read Only include the msg_write EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer write message to the same module msg_read EN msg_write EN MSG 4 5 4 5 Type Block Transfer Read CEND Message Control msg_read lt DN gt CER gt 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transfer read message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller msg_write block transfer write message to the same module MESSAGE name_of_controller controller Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 20 12 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 2 Enter the following rung When msg_read is done the FAL instruction moves the values in int_buffer_read to dints_input This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the controller
110. BT Module santa Saree ag ks 9 19 Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules 9 20 Address VO sae ge od i a PEERS aE REEEGAE ERED ESOS 9 22 Schedule the ControlNet Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 005 9 24 Validate Connections ss eh a oe Ka ee A eR 9 25 Stagger the Messages Oras aga go8 RE Phe ee Sie ek BGG 9 27 Chapter 10 When to Use This Procedure os agus Park ae age ane Gadus ha 10 1 How to Use This Procedure ois 44 Guna ty we as ap eg aa 10 1 Add the local 1756 CNB module oosies ody canada 10 2 Add the Remote 1794 ACN Module 04 10 4 Add VO Modules x 0 0 ta id Be eure det ye Feet ay a E 10 6 Greate Aliases ss j Sick vgn a E Ri owe et ade ot 10 10 Schedule the ControlNet Network 10 13 Validate Connections ho5 2d 5 4 600448 564 ROTOR REGS 10 14 Chapter 11 When to Use This Procedures 625i we es teks eae ee 11 1 How to Use This Procedure ace ebay Oe CER OE ESY Ate 11 2 Step 1 Add the 1756 CNB Module 0 11 3 Step 2 Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module 11 5 Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Module 11 8 Step 4 Add the Other Controller 11 10 Step 5 Enter a Message 2s wea git da ee Sy Pee Se Rohe 11 12 Step 6 Configure the Message 0005 11 14 Step 7 Stagger the Messages x4 444 PMs pe Rae Se FY 11 16 Step 8 Access Controllogix Data cuca daa be ews 11 16 Route PLC 5 Messages Between ControlNet Networks Co
111. Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 9 Add the Other Controller 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET x 1756 ENBx remote_ENB ENET lt __ A Right click remote _ENB ENET and select New Module B Select the type of controller and choose OK c gt Name I Slot jo 0 a Description Revision E fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module x 42377 C Type the name of the controller D Type or select the slot number of the controller E Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 5 10 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 F J Inhibit Module G e J Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 F Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE _ Inhibit a module To make it easier to test a system one module or section at a time 1 Initially inhibit all the modules 2 To test a section of the system clear the check boxes for the modules of that section G e uninhibit the modules If communication fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a modules fails the c
112. Create PanelView Tags 4 ecco he aia Riana eee Pes 6 12 Validate Connections 2 4 2 625 aresautle buts See 8 ohh at Bre BA ween 6 14 Chapter 7 When to Use This Procedure da et ee vise we bee ad 7 1 How to Use This Procedure 5 4 43464 ca sles ase ad aw 7 1 Configure an Ethernet Diver os n a aana s4 oes s eh es 7 2 Select a Communication Method 7 3 Create a Polled VOpie s s24 9 500 ahd te Gate ae ean ayn 7 4 Create a Polled Nodes 26453 peng s 28 Ba ed a 7 6 Import Logix5000 Tags fu analy a saaa brea arg aha aigoedin quale amp 7 7 Create Ai ie Files gt ace tv 5 Gh ee Bae Re Saeed 7 7 Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility 7 8 Use the Utility to Create a CSV Piles 4 a 8e bd ong es 7 8 Import the ESV File sx S04 dB Sle ehcp 50 ee deeds 7 10 Create a Polled Tae gic ages eo PR AGG Ree ah eae aR 7 12 Create a Unsolicited TOpiC ia 410 vie Bethi ONS a 7 14 Add the 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 7 16 Enter a Messa aeiy Sara anoa ede Gite SA tale a Gt te a ca alde Gace 7 18 Configure the Message hie rte ond Rd aca ated hie 7 20 Create an Unsolicited NOdE yo 344 44 5 8 BS5h Se TPES BO 7 22 Create an Unsolicited Tag 43g ele oy Re eS So Ke eee ds 7 23 Validate an RSView32 Vac ck baw ee a ee es 7 24 Chapter 8 When to Use This Procedure u4 5 5 we en eee en Ved oS 8 1 How to Use This Procedure bo hoe ok we 8 1 Add the Local 1756 CNB Module 0 00005 8 2 Add the Remot
113. D 7 Ca ce 5 ControlNet Network Dm o e By kl el a ul lp 3 7 go Ly pay le yr ControlLogix Controller FlexLogix Controller 42519 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 11 2 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary steps e Step 1 Add the 1756 CNB Module e Step 2 Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module e Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Module To complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 4 Add the Other Controller e Step 5 Enter a Message e Step 6 Configure the Message e Step 7 Stagger the Messages If a PLC 5 controller sends the message do the following step e Step 8 Access ControlLogix Data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 3 Step 1 Add the 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module en Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler Tasks MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends 3 6 Data Types i User Defined Predefined O Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration lt q 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D gt Na
114. E EN P August 2002 23 4 Configure Dial Up Communications J Click the System Protocol tab ME eae cae e _ E _ fo Autodetect 42392 K Select DF1 Point to Point Default L Select the error detection method that your equipment uses M Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box N Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure Dial Up Communications 23 5 Step 3 Dial the Other Use the following logic to dial another controller Controller When condition turns on the AWA instruction commands the modem to dial a remote controller The GSV instruction monitors the status of the serial port condition AWA GSV 4 ASCII Write Append cEN gt Get System Value Channel 0 l CIP Object Class DF1 Source modem_number 0 CDN gt CIP Object Name Attribute Name DiagnosticCounters SerialPort Control modem_dial CER gt Dest serial_port 0 String Length 0 Characters Sent 0 42393 Where Is condition condition in your that initiates the dial up sequence modem number array of SINTs that contains the string of ASCII characters that tell the modem to dial a specific telephone number String Length 0 which means to send all the characters in modem_number serial port array of 19 INTs INT 19 that stores the status of the serial port
115. HRIO Slot 0 Channel DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined 1756 CNB Slot 1 CNET Link 100 A 1756 CNB Network address 2 Backplane Link 30 Ei J 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel DH Link 40 Channel B DH Link Undefined 42190 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel A DH Link 40 Channel B DH Link Undefined 1756 CNB Slot 1 CNET Link 100 i 1756 CNB Network address 1 Backplane Link 10 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel A DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined 42191 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 5 Configure a routing table for each 1756 DHRIO module that is along the route or path to the other controller Step Detailed actions A For each network and each Here is an example ControlLogix backplane in your system designate a unique link ID number ControlNet network link ID 100 DIC D C l HIN ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane RIB backplane link ID 10 link ID 30 0 0 DH network DH network link ID 20 link ID 40 INS B Connect the hardware 1 Install the 1756 DHRIO module 2 Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation For example perform one of the foll
116. IP network use any of the following BOOTP server software e BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation e any BOOTP server software that is commercially available BOOTP server software P S E y ControlLogix B chassis M TETE Sai P S A EtherNet IP network E Flex 1 0 N The default setting for a Rockwell Automation EtherNet IP module is to use BOOTP to get its configuration information e At power up the module sends a message with its hardware address to the BOOTP server e The BOOTP server sends the appropriate configuration to the module The BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation lets you assign e IP address required e subnet mask recommended e gateway address optional Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 6 Configure an EtherNet IP Module How to Use This Procedure Use the following table to find the information that you need If you have this And you want Then See page module 1756 ENBx configure the module via another module that is in Configure a Module Using RSLogix 5000 1 7 1756 ENET the chassis e g controller 1756 CNB Software 1756 DHRIO or Configure a Module Using RSLinx 1 13 Software Note Both software let you configure the module Use the one that you prefer configure the module directly over an EtherNet IP Configure a Modul
117. If the chassis contains Then add less than 1 rack of 1 0 1 adapter for the chassis 1 rack of I 0 more than 1 rack of 1 0 1 adapter for each rack EXAMPLE _ Add remote I O adapters The I O configuration of the controller requires two remote I O adapters for this chassis One adapter is for rack 1 and the second adapter is for the 1 2 of rack 2 rack 1 rack 2 wnprpoenyno 1 0 Configuration x 1756 DHRIO x name_of_DHRIO lt __ 1 Right click name_of_DHRIO and select New Module 2 Select an adapter module and click OK If the 1 0 is Then select 1747 1747 ASB 1771 1771 ASB 1791 RIO ADAPTER 1794 1794 ASB Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 7 42441 3 Type a name for the adapter module Use a name that identifies the I O of this adapter 4 Type or select rack number of this module Select the channel on 1756 DHRIO module that is network is connected to y 6 Type or select the starting group number 7 For the rack number of this adapter select the number of groups in this chassis Round up to the nearest even number of groups 8 Click Next 9 1 42401 9 Type the rate at which the I O of this adapter must update 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check bo
118. Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work F 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A VO oinguan 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 26 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 164
119. KTC X card Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 3 Select a Communication Select a method for transferring the data Method If the data Then go to needs regular delivery at a rate that you Create a Polled Topic on page 14 4 specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in Create a Unsolicited Topic on page 14 14 your application Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 14 4 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create a Polled Topic RSLogix 5000 software revision 10 0 or later automatically creates DDE OPC topics in RSLinx software whenever you e create a project e save a project e change the revision of a project to 10 0 or later In some cases you have to update the data source for the topic in RSLinx software as shown in steps E G of this section A Display RSLinx software B From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration C In the bottom left corner of the window click New D Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key To expand a network one level do one Data Source of the following e Double click the network a Norkstation e Select the network and press t a AB_KTC x ControlNet the key e Click the sign E On the Data Source tab expand the ControlNet driver e g AB_KTC 1 until you see the ControlLogix controller Data Source
120. MSG Type Module Reconfigure Message Control change_Halarm E i 43006 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 E 2 Reconfigure an 1 0 module Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Numerics 1747 1 0 20 1 1756 1 0 3 1 8 1 1756 BA1 25 1 1756 BATA battery assembly 26 1 1756 BATM battery module 26 1 1756 CNB module 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 13 1 1756 DHRIO module 17 1 18 1 20 1 1756 ENBx module 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 1756 ENET module 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 1756 M02AE module 24 1 1756 NET AIC 19 3 1771 1 0 ControlNet network 9 1 remote I O network 20 1 1788 CNC module 11 1 1791 1 0 20 1 1794 1 0 ControlNet network 10 1 EtherNet IP network 4 1 remote I O network 20 1 1794 AENx module 1 1 4 1 A address map A 1 AIC 19 3 asynchronous execution D 1 B battery 1756 BA1 25 1 1756 BATA battery assembly 26 1 1756 BATM battery module 26 1 block transfers ControlNet network 9 1 remote 0 network 20 1 C Communicate Over a Remote I 0 Network 20 1 Communicate with 1756 1 0 3 1 8 1 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 1 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 1 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 1 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 1 Index Communicate with an RSView32 Project ControlNet network 14 1 Ethernet network 7 1 Communicate with Another Controller ControlNet network 11 1 DH network 17 1 DH 485 network
121. N P August 2002 13 4 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network H t J Inhibit Module t J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 5 Add the PanelView i E 140 Configuration Terminal 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B
122. Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Table 11 B Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Me
123. O points or channels devices As an alias for an I O point or channel each tag e provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel e represents the value of the point or channel When one changes the other reflects the change EXAMPLE o The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices Start is an alias tor the push button that is wired to point 1 of the motor is an alias tor the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 ot module that is in slot 2 of the rail named conveyor When the push the module that is in slot 1 of the rail named conveyor When button is on start is on motor turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt conveyor 2 1 Data 0 gt lt conveyor 2 Data 1 gt lt conveyor 1 0 Data 0 gt HE an motor lt conveyor 1 0 Data 0 gt J 42435 A From the Logic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram x Show fShow All 7j Sort Tag Name gt Alias For Base Tag Type Tag Name 42421 p Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 11 B Select the scope of the descriptive tag C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W D Click the V E Click the Controlle
124. Optimization format a structure associated with the communication module in the remote chassis actually transfers the data structure for the communication module e g ENB CNB LL T1 lt conveyor Slot 1 Data 1 gt Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 UJ mi Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 15 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work F 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A VO oinguan 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Conne
125. P August 2002 6 2 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary task e Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add the PanelView Terminal e Organize Your Data e Configure the PanelView Terminal e Create PanelView Tags To check your work do the following task e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 3 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline ENET Module Ba Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Ta 6 8 MainTask 3 68 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs C3 Trends 3 6 Data Types Ca User Defined 8 Predefined Ca Module Defined C3 140 Configuration lt q __ 42376 2 Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then Yes Go to Add the PanelView Terminal No Right click 0 Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 6 4 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network C IP Address Host Name lt
126. Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 23 6 Configure Dial Up Communications Step 4 Send the Message A Enter the following logic Serial port 1 contains the status of the modem signals When bit 3 is on DCD is high the modem is receiving the carrier from the remote modem and communication is established At this point the message is sent to the remote controller serial_port 1 38 message EN MSG Ths y o J E 4 6 Type Unconfigured t CEN Message Control message _ CDN gt I CER gt 42387 Where Is serial port array of 19 INTs INT 19 that stores the status of the serial port message tag that controls the execution of the message MESSAGE data type B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure Dial Up Communications 23 7 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs EXAMPLE Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When serial_port 1 3 turns on reads 16 bit integer values NTs and st
127. RES gt File Arith Logical CEND Control dints_to_ints Length DND Position 0 Mode ALL ER gt Dest int_buffer_write dints_to_ints POS Expression dints_output dints_to_ints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transfer read message to the same MESSAGE name_of_controller module controller msg_write block transfer write message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller dints_to_ints converts the 32 bit integers from the Logix5000 CONTROL name_of controller controller to 16 bit integers for the BT module controller FAL Length number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length int_buffer_write array that stores the data to send to the BT module as 16 bit integers INT length name_of_controller controller dints_output array that stores the output data that other instructions produce for the module Where length DINT length Is the name of controller controller number of elements to transfer 2 Enter the following rung After the FAL instruction converts the DINTs to INTs the MSG instruction sends the data in int_buffer_write to the module dints_to_ints DN MSG a a af le Message Control Type Block Transfer Write msg_write CEN gt CDN gt CER gt 42463 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 20 14 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Configure the Messages 1 In the
128. Save the Relation List The relation list contains the configuration that you have just sent to a module You can use it as a record of the configuration of each module or to re configure the module in the future 1 From the File menu choose Save Relation List 2 Type or select a file name 3 Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1 20 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Renew the IP Address of a To renew reset the IP address of a 1794 AENx module 1794 AENx Module e Install BOOTPServer Software e Set Up the Hardware e Enter the New Configuration e Send the Configuration e Disable BOOTP e Save the Relation List Install BOOTPServer Software To renew the IP address of a 1794 AENx module use BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation You can find the software at either of these locations e RSLogix 5000 software CD ENU TOOLS BootP Utility folder BootPServer exe e www ab com networks Set Up the Hardware 1 Cycle the power to the module 00 00 BC 06 00 6A Ethernet Adapter 2 Write down the Ethernet address of the module 3 Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 21 Enter the New Configuration 1 Start the BOOTPServer software m Relation List 2 gt New Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway 00 00 BC 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255
129. T tag a Create a tag of the REAL data type b Move the DINT tag to the REAL tag Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 11 EXAMPLE Organize unscheduled e not time critical data Copies the value of bit 3 of station_1_status DINT tag to station_1 start a member of the station_1 structure station_1_status 3 station_1 start 7 gt JE ke Copies the value of counter DN to bit 1 of station_1_status DINT tag counter DN station_1_status 1 TE C3 J E RUN_mode is an alias for bit 4 of station_1_status DINT tag RUN_mode lt station_1 _Status 4 gt Moves pu_write_1 an integer that the PanelView writes to shift_entry DINT tag and moves shift_display DINT tag to pu_read_1i an integer that the PanelView reads MOV MOV Move Move Source pv_write_1 Source shift_display 0 0 0 Dest shift_entry Dest pv_read_1 0 0 0 42403 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 13 12 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Configure the PanelView Terminal Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 A Start PanelBuilder32 software B NEIWOIK NOES _Node name Node address Node tye Open an existing PanelBuilder application or create a new application From the Application menu select Settings Click the Comms Setup button Terminal name_of_te
130. Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Rockwell Automation Br hlstra e 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 351 6723 Fax 65 355 1733 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 PN 957689 28 Supersedes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Copyright 2002 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A AB Allen Bradl ey ControlLogix System User Manual
131. Ts from the module and stores them in int_buffer_read Only include the msg_write EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer write message to the same module msg_read EN msg_write EN MSG 4 5 4 5 Type Block Transfer Read EN Message Control msg_read lt DN gt CER gt 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transfer read message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller msg_write block transfer write message to the same module MESSAGE name_of_controller controller Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 9 2 Enter the following rung When msg_read is done the FAL instruction moves the values in int_buffer_read to dints_input This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the controller msg_read DN ints_to_dints FAL PE CRES gt File Arith Logical CEND Control ints_to_dints Length DN gt Position 0 Mode ALL CER gt Dest dints_input ints_to_dints POS Expression int_buffer_read ints_to_dints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope int_buffer_read array that stores the data from the BT module INT length name_of controller controller ints_to_dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name_of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 controller controller FAL Le
132. View projects e RSView32 project e RSView Machine Edition project developed with RSView Studio software RSView32 or RSView Machine Edition project 5 ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 CNB Module WN TTT 42520 ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure To communicate with an RSView project you have two options If the data Then use a needs regular delivery at a rate that you polled message specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in unsolicited message your application Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 14 2 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlINet Network Configure a ControlNet A Start RSLinx software Driver B From the Communications menu select Configure Drivers C From the Available Driver Types list select the type of ControlNet communication card D Click Add New E Assign a name to the driver if desired F Supply the required information about the communication card EXAMPLE Configure a 1784 KTC X card Station Name JABKTC Unused interrupt number gt nterrupt None Memory address from the Mem Address D000 DIP switch on the 1784 KTC X card G Click OK H Click Close Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Net Address 1 0 Base 2200 42465 ControlNet node number for the workstation 1 0 base memory address from the DIP switches on the 1784
133. _ints_to_dints DN is on the ADD instruction increments the B7R_index This lets the MSG instruction read the next module BTF_ints_to_dints DN 3 Add Source 1 DD Source B BTF_index 0e Dest BTR index 0e 43021 2 Enter the following rung If the EQU instruction is true the MSG instruction has read the last BT module The CLR instruction resets BTR_index to zero This lets the MSG instruction start the series of reads again starting with the first module EQU LA 4 Equal Clear Source BTF_index Dest BTR_index 0e 0e Source B BT_input_modules pe 43021 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 20 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules SIZE 6 Size in Elements Source BT_output 0 0 o Dim To Vary 0 Size BT_output_modules 0e 43022 BTW EN BTW _dints_to_ints MOY 7 2 PS auus RE Move Source BTw_cfo BTw_indes REQ_LEN 0 Dest BTW _dints_to_ints LEN o File Arith Loaical Control BT W_dints_to_ints Length 0e D Position 0e Mode ALL R gt Dest BTW_int_buffer_write BT W_dints_to_ints POS 0 Expression BT_output BTW_index BTW_dints_to_ints POS 43022 BTW_dints_to_ints DN MOV 8 Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index REQ_LEN 0 Dest BTW REQ_LEN De COP MOV Copy File Move Source BTW_cfg BTW_index Path Source BTW_cfo BTW_index Slot Dest BTW Path 0 Length 1 Dest BTW Slot De Publication 1756 UM001E EN P Aug
134. a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Choose Next 43019 Choose New Axis Type a name for the tag for this node axis and choose OK Select the name of the tag from step 10 If this is a multi axis drive repeat steps 9 11 for each axis Choose Next Program Motion Control 24 9 Create a Motion Group Bus Regulator Catalog Number t 43024 14 Which type of bus regulator does this drive use If Then select external catalog number of the regulator internal Internal none lt none gt 15 Choose Finish Controller Tasks Z Motion Groups __ _ Right click and select New Ungrouped Axes Motion Group name_of_axis Type a name for the group Trends and choose OK Data Types 1 0 Configuration x 1756 MO08SE Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 10 Program Motion Control Assign the Properties of the Motion Group Controller Tasks Motion Groups Name_of_New_Group lt 1 Right click and select Motion Group Properties Ungrouped Axes name_of_axis Trends Axis Assignment Attribute Tag Unassigned Assigned Add gt lt Remov
135. access from your workstation For example perform one of the following e Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756 DHRIO module e Connect each chassis to an EtherNet IP ControlNet or DH network 3 Power up each chassis Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 18 4 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Step C Display the routing table Detailed actions 1 Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following e Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet e Select the network and press the l F AB_DF1 x DF1 key e Click the sign 2 Se Expand the network from step B until you see the 1756 DHRIO module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax p gt F x 1756 DHRIO Right click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration 4 Click the DHRIO Routing Table tab D Define the link ID of the backplane 1 At the top of the routing table right click the backplane link and choose in which the 1756 DHRIO module Edit Module resides 2 Type the link ID of the backplane and choose OK E Define the link IDs of the 1 Right click the 1756 DHRIO m
136. age page 17 20 A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks Ea MainTask 3 68 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends Data Types CR User Defined Predefined ER Module Defined E3 1 0 Configuration lt 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your series of 1756 DHRIO module and click OK D gt Name a I Sees E Type Baud Rate Channel DH z 57 6K v Channel B RIO 57 6K Revision Pf Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 lt F 42440 Description Parent Local D Type a name for the module i e name_of _DHRIO E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 17 12 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Requested Packet Interval RPI ms H e f Inhibit Module 1 e J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode big H Initially do you wan
137. ates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 9 Choose Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 6 Program Motion Control Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1756 M02AE m Associated Axes Channel 0 lt none gt vy 7 New Axis Channel 1 lt none gt z a A 43031 10 10 Choose New Axis 11 12 13 14 Type a name for the axis and choose OK Assign the axis to a channel the physical connection on the servo module to which the axis is wired Repeat steps 10 12 for the other channel if required Choose Finish 1756 M08SE Data Rate j bf Mb 15 gt Cycle Time po j x ms 16 p Transmit Power High x 15 16 17 43017 How many axes are connected to this module In the next section you associate the axes with the module If this number of axes Then select a Cycle Time of 1 4 1 5 8 2 Select the intensity of the light beam on the fiber optic cable For cables that span long distances or cables that are low quality select High Choose Finish Program Motion Control 24 7 17
138. ation of the controller 5 For each SERCOS drive make sure that the drive goes to Step 4 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 18 Program Motion Control Display the Properties for the Axis Controller Tasks Motion Groups Name_of_New_Group name_of_axis lt _ Right click and select Axis Ungrouped Axes Properties Trends Complete the Hookup Tests fe EGstive S WEoaive fe Positive te Weqatye 43034 1 Click the Hookup tab 2 Type number of increments that the axis moves during each test 3 Select each test and follow the prompts 4 When you finish the hookup tests choose OK For more information about hookup diagnostics see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 Program Motion Control 24 19 Develop Logic for Motion Control To write a motion application program you can insert motion instructions directly into your ladder logic program The motion instructions operate on one or more axes You must identify and configure axes before you can use them For more information about configuring axes see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UMO006 For more information on individual motion instructions see the Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1
139. ber Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 C Click the Communication tab D In the Path box type the following path 2 station address where station address is the DF1 address of the controller that is receiving the message E Leave the communication method at the default settings of e CIP e Cache Connections This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port F Click OK Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 17 Step 8 Stagger the As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the Messages execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each g message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 22 18 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Notes Pu
140. ber Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse 2 address 1 0 where logical address such as F8 0 Click the Communication tab Select the 1756 CNB module and click OK In the Path text box add address is the ControlNet node number of the workstation EXAMPLE Complete path entry washer_chassis 2 5 1 0 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 21 G On the Communication tab specify the following parameters For this item Type or select CIP With Source ID Communication Method Source Link Remote ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step L Destination Link Virtual Link ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step D Destination Node 77 RSLinx reserves node 77 for DDE topics H Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 14 22 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create an Unsolicited Node A Open the RSView project im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project 3 x Edit Mode Your AS iew_Project B System Project Settings i Channel E Channel de Node q B Node AM Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts Activity Log Setup ed oe ee ed ent IW Scan Class a Tag Database Le Tag Monitor 43081 User Accounts 4 B Double click Node
141. blication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 23 Configure Dial Up Communications When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to send a message to another controller over a public telephone line 42394 How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step e Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems To complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 2 Configure the Serial Port of the Controller e Step 3 Dial the Other Controller e Step 4 Send the Message e Step 5 Configure the Message e Step 6 Hang Up e Step 7 Stagger the Messages For additional information see SCADA System Application Guide publication AG 6 5 8 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 23 2 Configure Dial Up Communications Step 1 Connect and A Connect each controller to the modem using the following Allen Bradley cable Configure the Modems RE ene A B 1784 CAS 25 pin male modem connector The cable has the following wiring controller modem 9 pin female 25 pin male DCD 1 lt 8 RXD 2 4 3 TXD 3 2 DTR 4 gt 20 COMMON 5 7 DSR 6 a 6 RTS 7 gt 4 CTS 8 a 5 B Configure the modems Configure this signal To DSR be on high when a modem connection exists DCD CD be on high whenever the modem receives the carrier from the remote modem DTR hang up when the controller change
142. cations 22 13 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller condition message EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured END Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 H CRES File Arith Logical CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos Write integers to a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller condition fal_control FAL 4 E CRES gt File Arith Logical CEN Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG J E 4 5 Type Unconfigured CEN Message Control message CDN gt CER gt Where dint array Is an array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int _buffer array of INT
143. ccept N If this is an RSView32 project go to Validate an RSView32 Tag Create a Unsolicited Topic A Display RSLinx software B From the Communications menu select Configure Client Applications C Click the Virtual Link ID tab D Do you want to use the same Virtual Link ID for each workstation in your system Node or IP addresses are sufficient to distinguish between workstations If Then Yes 1 Record the Virtual Link ID number which you will use in subsequent steps 2 Click OK No 1 Enter a unique Virtual Link ID for the workstation 2 Click OK 3 Close the RSLinx software If you configured RSLinx software to start as a service you must also stop the service 4 Re open the RSLinx software E From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration F In the bottom left corner of the window click New G Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlINet Network 14 15 H Click the Data Collection tab I Specify the following parameters For this item Do this Processor Type Select PLC 5 Data Collection Mode 1 Clear the Polled Messages check box 2 Select the Unsolicited Messages check box J Click the Advanced Communication tab K Specify the following parameters For this item Type or select Communication Driver driver for the network across which you wil
144. ce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 5 Step 2 Add the Remote Determine if you must complete this step 1756 CNB Module If the other controller is a Then ControlLogix controller Complete this step FlexLogix controller Go to Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Module PLC 5C controller Go to Step 4 Add the Other Controller E 140 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of CNB that is in the remote chassis and click OK C Name Node f e st D H Description Chassis Size fio H q E sl t E H e k p Comm Format Rack Optimization i Revision a fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 lt H 42404 C Type a name for the CNB module Use a name that identifies the T O in the chassis D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis F Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None G Type or select the slot number where
145. clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 8 4 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 E 140 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module Select the type of CNB that is in the remote chassis and click OK Node f lt q D Chassis Size fio H lt E Slet 9 t_G Comm Format Rack Optimization a po fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt a H 42404 Type a name for the CNB module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Y
146. control pos Write integers to a MicroLogix controller When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller condition fal_control FAL 4 E CRES gt File Arith Logical CEN Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG J E 4 5 Type Unconfigured CEN Message Control message CDN gt CER gt Where dint array Is an array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int _buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 19 8 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 4 Configure the Message Table 19 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If the data is structure s And you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type A In the MSG instruction click M B Select a configuration for the message Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controll
147. cription BT_input data from each BT module e The first dimension represents each module e The second dimension represents the data from a module SIZE Size in Elements Source BT_input 0 0 o Dim To Vary 0 Size BT_input_modules pe 43020 Data Type Scope DINT number length name of _ controller controller BT_input_modules number of modules that the MSG instruction must read Where number DINT name_of_controller controller Is the number of modules that this message reads length Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 maximum number of elements in any of the block transfers Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 15 Send a Block Transfer Read Message 1 Enter the following rung The MSG instruction reads the input values from a BT module and stores the values in B7R_int_buffer_read e Each time the instruction is done it automatically restarts and sends another message e Prior to each message the series of MOV and COPY instructions load the appropriate configuration properties into the MSG instruction so it can read the next BT module The configuration properties load from the B7R_cfg array e After each MSG a subsequent rung increments the B7R_index tag This loads the configuration properties for the next module into the MSG instruction before it executes again BTR EN MOV MOV 1 Move Move Source BTR_cfg BTR_inde
148. ction request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 3 16 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1640300 16 03FF r gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 4 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are wired Procedure to 1794 I O modules when a e 1756 ENBx or a 1756 ENET B module connects the local chassis to a EtherNet IP network e 1794 AENx module connects the 1794 I O modules to the same EtherNet IP network 1756 ENBx or ENET 1794 AENx module module fataletefetetotetetetetetetetotomm Keletetofoteteteteleletotototeto mm Keteletoteroreleleto elotelelelo Mm Kelstelelelelelelele sle1s1e1e1e 0000000000900090 0005000000009990 50000000000
149. d Message e Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module e Convert the INTs to DINTs e Step to the Next BT Module To write data to multiple block transfer modules see the logic on page 9 20 Create a User Defined Data Type Create the following data type You will use this for the array that stores the message properties for each module Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types User Defined q 1 Right click and select New Data Type 2 Assign the following Name BT_CONFIGURATION Description Configuration properties for a block transfer message to a specific module Members Name Data Type Style Description REQ_LEN INT Decimal number of elements INTs to read or write Slot SINT Decimal slot number of the module Path STRING path to the 1771 ACN module Use the Message Path editor to assign the path Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 14 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Create the Array for the Input Data Enter the following rung The SIZE instruction determines the number of elements in the first dimension Dim 0 of the B7_input array Since this dimension contains one element for each BT module this instruction determines how many modules the MSG instruction must read A subsequent rung uses this number to determine the end of the sequence of MSGs 0 Tag Name Des
150. data type that matches the data type of the tag in the ControlLogix controller 6 Is this data time critical e g turn a machine on or off If Then select No A Network Address B From the Node Name list select the controller Yes Assembly Object Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 13 7 Specify the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller If the message type And its data And the Specify Is type Is Network Address p p array_name element Assembly Object bit PanelView writes the data Alx y z PanelView reads the data A0x y z DINT PanelView writes the data Alx y PanelView reads the data AOx y Where Is array _name name of the array in the controller element element number within the array x instance number of this connection with the controller If the input assembly And the output assembly Then the instance number instance is instance is is 7 6 1 9 8 2 11 10 3 13 12 4 15 14 5 17 16 6 19 18 7 21 20 8 y element of the PanelView input or output structure in the controller Z bit number within the input or output element EXAMPLE Specify the address of a tag in the ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller PanelView Application name_of_panelview l Data 0 1 Al1 0 1 name_of_panelview 0 Data 3 A01 3 screen_al5 screen_a 5 8 C
151. dress required e subnet mask recommended e gateway address optional e domain name optional e DNS server addresses optional When you configure a module with RSLogix 5000 software you enter an IP address or host name in two locations On this tab You General first screen of the Identify the module on the EtherNet IP network with which Module Properties wizard you want to connect Port Configuration Assign configuration information to the module such as its IP address This information is stored in the module and identifies the module on the EtherNet IP network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 4 Configure an EtherNet IP Module RSLinx Software RSLinx software lets you configure a 1756 ENBx or ENET module via another module in the chassis controller P S L E ControlLogix 3 N 5 B chassis x x another communication module module to configure RSLinx software P S DICIE E H N N NJ_ ControlLogix Wh R B B BY chassis PETEN 0 r Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1756 CP3 or 1747 CP3 serial cable Use RSLinx software to assign e IP address required e subnet mask recommended e gateway address optional e domain name optional e DNS server addresses optional Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 5 BOOTP Server Software To configure a module over an EtherNet
152. dule C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 3 4 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network D Name Address Host Name Description z C P Address H Host Name lt Unspecitied gt E Slot 2 Revision e fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module i 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 5 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET q
153. dule 9 From the File menu choose Save 10 Download the project to the controller Configure the Port 1 In the controller organizer right click the ENB or ENET module and select Properties 2 Click the Port Configuration tab a gt o oo 07 _ SSS ESERE 5 EES REN 6 Rea vs 3 Clear uncheck the Enable Bootp check box 4 Type the IP address of the module 5 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 6 Type the gateway address for the module if you need one Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 11 7 Will you use host names to specify other EtherNet IP devices d e When you send a message or configure a remote ENB or ENET module will you use a host name instead of an IP address If Then Yes Go to step 8 No Go to step 10 42423 8 Type the name of the domain of the module 9 Type the IP address of the server or servers that contain the DNS database for the domain 10 Choose Set A dialog box asks you to confirm your changes 11 To apply your changes choose OK 12 To close the Module Properties dialog box choose OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 12 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Check the Module To make sure that this procedure was successful look at the front of the module For this module Check this indicator For this indication 1756 ENET OK LED solid green 1756 ENBx fou
154. e 43025 3 2 Select the axis 3 Choose Add gt Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Program Motion Control 24 11 4 Axis Assignment Attribute Tag 5 Coarse Update Period ms 6 _ gt Auto Tag Update Disabled 43026 4 5 7 Click the Attribute tab Type or select the rate at which you want the controller to update the axes that are assigned to this group e For a 1756 MO8SE module set the Coarse Update Period to a multiple of the Cycle Time Do you want to monitor any of the following members of an axis of this group directly via its tag A GSV instruction always lets you access these values regardless of this selection e ActualAcceleration e ActualPosition e ActualVelocity e AverageVelocity e CommandaAcceleration e CommandPosition e CommandVelocity e MasterOffset If Then select Notes Yes Enabled This increases the motion execution time of the controller See Logix5000 Controllers Execution Time and Memory Use Reference Manual publication 1756 RM087 No Disabled Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 12 Program Motion Control Configure the Axis To configure an axis e Display the Properties for the Axis e Select an Axis Configuration e Assign Units for Measurements e Assign a Conversion Constant e 1756 M02AE Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive e 1756 MO8SE Select th
155. e e Create the Data Array e Send the Message to a BT Module e Enter the Message Properties for Each Module e Convert the INTs to DINTs e Step to the Next BT Module To write data to multiple block transfer modules see the logic on page 20 24 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 17 Create a User Defined Data Type Create the following data type You will use this for the array that stores the message properties for each module Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types User Defined lt g H L Right click and select New Data Type 2 Assign the following Name BT_CONFIGURATION Description Configuration properties for a block transfer message to a specific module Members Name Data Type Style Description REQ_LEN INT Decimal number of elements INTs to read or write Channel SINT ASCII channel A or B of the 1756 DHRIO module to which this module is connected Rack SINT Octal rack number of the module octal Group SINT Decimal group number of the module Slot SINT Decimal slot number of the module Path STRING path to the 1756 DHRIO module Use the Message Path editor to assign the path Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 20 18 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Create the Data Array 1 Enter the f
156. e on page 1 1 To communicate with an RSView project you have two options lf the data Then use a needs regular delivery at a rate that you polled message specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in unsolicited message your application Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 7 2 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Configure an Ethernet In this task you configure an RSLinx driver to communicate with Dri devices on an EtherNet IP network You can configure the driver to river communicate with up to 63 devices on this network such as 1756 ENET modules or PLC 5E controllers A Go to RSLinx software B From the Communications menu choose Configure Drivers C From the Available Driver Types list choose Ethernet devices D Choose Add New E If you want assign a descriptive name to the driver change the default name F Choose OK Station Mapping Add New Delete G In the Host Name column type the IP address or host name of an EtherNet IP device with which you want to communicate 42585 Examples e aurora6 e 130 151 136 164 H Do you want to communicate with another EtherNet IP device on this network Yes 1 Choose Add New 2 Go to Step G No Go to the next step I Choose OK J Choose Close Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 3 Select a Communication Sel
157. e 1756 CNB Module 0 8 4 Add I O Modules oo gs6 5 0 seack Ganges eid amp ace Gouda oa gedit 8 6 Create Aliases So cat ob F aie ani th de abcde E a a alm dade CH 8 10 Schedule the ControlNet Network 8 13 Validate Connections 08 Ca 64s SA a hese eS ps 8 14 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Table of Contents iv Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 9 When to Use This Procedure 2px s eee he oe 9 1 How to Use This Procedure 8 4 5 8S498864 PPR GS ES oo 9 1 Add the Local 1756 CNB Module 000 9 3 Add the 1771 ACN Module 0 0 000055 9 5 Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module 9 7 Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 9 8 Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer NIGAINGtG ins digs ce Sar hh SA EE A OS Le Des 9 10 Configure the Messages saan bias Oohaare aw saa 9 11 Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules 9 12 Create a User Defined Data Type n annaa a ies ys 9 13 Create the Array for the Input Data 9 14 Send a Block Transfer Read Message 9 15 Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module 9 17 Convert the INTs to DINTS onanan a aaa 9 18 Step to the Next
158. e C 1 IP address assign 1 1 L LED RS232 19 10 M Map a PLC SLC Address A 1 memory controller usage C 1 messages ControlNet network 11 1 DH 17 1 18 1 DH 485 19 1 dial up 23 1 Ethernet network 5 1 map address A 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 master and slave controllers 22 1 MicroLogix controller DH 485 network 19 1 modem 22 1 23 1 Monitor Connections 15 1 motion control program 24 1 P PanelView Terminal ControlNet network 13 1 EtherNet IP network 6 1 PLC 5 controllers ControlNet network 11 1 12 1 DF1 22 1 DH 17 1 18 1 Ethernet network 5 1 map address A 1 program over a serial cable 21 1 over an Ethernet network 2 1 Program a Controller over an Ethernet Network 2 1 Program Motion Control 24 1 remote 0 1756 3 1 8 1 1771 9 1 20 1 1794 4 1 10 1 20 1 route messages ControlNet networks 12 1 DH network 18 1 routing table 17 1 18 1 RS232 LED 19 10 RSView32 project ControlNet network 14 1 Ethernet network 7 1 S serial cable 19 3 21 1 22 1 serial communications dial up 23 1 master and slave controllers 22 1 workstation 21 1 SLC 500 controller DF1 22 1 DH 17 1 18 1 DH 485 network 19 1 Index 3 Ethernet network 5 1 U map address A 1 Universal Remote 1 0 network 20 1 T time execution B 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 4 Index Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Index 5 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 6 Ind
159. e Catalog Number of the Amplifier e 1756 MO8SE Select the Motor and Feedback Display the Properties for the Axis Controller Tasks Motion Groups Name_of_New_Group name_of_axis lt _ Right click and select Axis Ungrouped Axes Properties Trends Select an Axis Configuration Output Limits Offset Fau General Units Conversion Servo Homing Hookup Select the type of axis that you want _____ys Asis Configuration Servo x 43033 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Program Motion Control 24 13 Assign Units for Measurements 1 Click the Units tab 2 Type the units in which you want to program such as revs degrees inches or millimeters Assign a Conversion Constant 200000 0 43028 1 Click the Conversion tab 2 Select the type of axis positioning that you want to use 3 Type the counts per unit Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 24 14 Program Motion Control 1756 M02AE Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive 9 9 43032 1 Click the Servo tab 2 Select the configuration of the servo drive 3 Optional Select the two attributes of the AXIS object that you want to access via either a GSV instruction or tag name 4 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Program Motion Control 24 15 1756 MO08SE Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier Position Serv
160. e Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 11 J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a m le fails th ATTENTION communicatio a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic L Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 3 12 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Create Aliases In this task you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I O points or channels devices As an alias for an I O point or channel each tag e provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel e
161. e EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 E CRES File Arith Logical CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the RSView project Where dint array condition fal_control FAL J E lt RES gt _ File Arith Logical ED Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 i Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG J E 4 5 Type Unconfigured __ CEND Message Control message CDN gt CER gt Is an 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 7 20 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Configure the Message Table 7 1 Message to a RSView project If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type In the MSG instruction click On the Configuration tab specify the following parameters Type
162. e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 e Program a message to communicate with multiple devices Refer to Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules on page 20 15 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 2 1 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure when you want to perform any of the following over a serial cable e download a project to a controller e go online and monitor a controller e edit a project while it is running in a controller save online changes to the offline project file upload 42385 How to Use This Procedure f you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step e Step 1 Connect a Serial Cable To complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 2 Configure a Serial Driver e Step 3 Select a Path Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 21 2 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable Step 1 Connect a Serial Cable Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 40043 A Obtain a 1756 CP3 serial cable You can also use a 1747 CP3 cable from the SLC product family but once the cable is connected you cannot close the controller door TIP If you make your own serial cable e Limit the length to 15 2m 50 fv ieee e Wire the connectors as follows
163. e Using BOOTP 1 16 network 1794 AENx configure the module Configure a Module Using BOOTP 1 16 re establish communication because either Renew the IP Address of a 1794 AENx 1 20 e The configuration of the module is incorrect Module for your network e You do not know the IP address of the module any make sure that you can communicate with the Test the Configuration 1 24 module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 7 Configure a Module Using To configure a module using RSLogix 5000 software RSLogix 5000 Software e Connect the Hardware e Connect to the Module e Configure the Port e Check the Module Connect the Hardware 1 Install the module 2 Connect your computer to a module with which you can already communicate The module must be in the same chassis as the module that you want to configure TIP To set up communication between your computer and a controller see Connect Directly to a gt Controller on page 1 24 3 Turn on the power to the module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 8 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Connect to the Module 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline a Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks 8 MainTask 3 68 MainProgram Fj Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends 3 6 Data Types Ca User Defined Pred
164. e a device in the chassis as a coordinated system time CST master This synchronizes all servo modules and controllers in the chassis to the same system clock IMPORTANT Only one device in a chassis can be the CST master You have the following options e Define the Controller as the CST Master or e Define a 1756 SYNCH Module as the CST Master Program Motion Control 24 3 Define the Controller as the CST Master 1 In the controller organizer right click the Controller folder and select Properties 2 Click the Date Time tab 3 Is another controller in the chassis the CST master If Then No Select the Make this controller the master check box Yes Clear the Make this controller the master check box 4 Click OK Define a 1756 SYNCH Module as the CST Master 1 In the controller organizer right click the 1756 SYNCH module and choose Properties 2 Click the Time Mastership tab General Connection Associated Axes SynchLink Configuration Resensseseecsscsesssssesesssssenssessssssossnssnssnssnssssssssensenssnssnsssssessessened z Make this module the Coordinated Make this module the Cor 3 Select this check box ad System Time Master for the chassis a System Time Master for t 43085 4 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 4 Program Motion Control Add the Motion Module 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Controller Tasks Motion G
165. ect a method for transferring the data Method If the data Then go to needs regular delivery at a rate that you Create a Polled Topic on page 7 4 specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in Create a Unsolicited Topic on page 7 14 your application Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 7 4 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create a Polled Topic RSLogix 5000 software revision 10 0 or later automatically creates DDE OPC topics in RSLinx software whenever you e create a project e save a project e change the revision of a project to 10 0 or later In some cases you have to update the data source for the topic in RSLinx software as shown in steps E G of this section A Display RSLinx software B From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration C In the bottom left corner of the window click New D Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key Workstation To expand a network one level do one Data Source of the following e Double click the network e Select the network and press amp the key e Click the sign AB_ETH x Ethernet E On the Data Source tab expand the AB_ETH x driver until you see the ControlLogix controller Data Source Workstation AB_ETH x Ethernet p XXX XXX XXX XXX
166. ed Integer Data wiring_mode omit the time stamp Integer Data wiring_mode isolated or temperature measuring analog input 25 ms sample time or greater is sufficient time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data sample time must be less than 25 ms time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data analog output associated inputs are REALs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data associated inputs are INTs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 3 10 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Name Slot a pe Comm Format Revision ER f H Electronic Keying Compatible Module x a G 42420 Description G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying H Click Next Y Requested Packet Interval RPI ms J T Inhibit Module K J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 I In step F did you select Rack Optimization as th
167. ed Packet Interval RPI ms 10 J Inhibit Module 1 J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 9 In step 6 did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box 11 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a module fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 12 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Address 1 0 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 11 To monitor or control an I O device assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic e For step by step instructions on how
168. efined CR Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration lt q 42376 2 Right click VO Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 9 C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecitied gt Description 4 Name m Address Host Name 5 Slot 2 ad Revision 2 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module t 42579 6 4 Type a name for the module 5 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 6 How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying 7 Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 8 Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 10 Configure an EtherNet IP Mo
169. elect the scope of the descriptive tag C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W D Click the V E Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it is available All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Select the I O device that the tag represents If the device is Then digital 1 Nextto name slot X click the sign 2 Click the Data member 3 To the right of the Data member click M A Click the point number of the device analog 1 Next to name slot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click ChzData Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the communication module in the chassis such as a 1756 ENBx or 1756 CNB module slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 Chz channel that the device is wired to G Press the Enter key or click another cell Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 8 12 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network When you finish the Tags window should look similar to the following Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 Data 1 C conveyor 1 Data 1 C start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor A Even if the I O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format address the required poi
170. em e after you install the module in your system Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1 2 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Before You Begin The configuration of an EtherNet IP module includes e IP address required e subnet mask recommended e gateway address optional e domain name optional e DNS server addresses optional You use software to configure an EtherNet IP module The modules do not have hardware switches to assign an address To configure a module use one of these software e RSLogix 5000 Software e RSLinx Software e BOOTP Server Software To determine which software lets you configure your module use the following table To configure this module Use one of these software RSLogix 5000 RSLinx BOOTP server 1756 ENBx Vv Vv Vv 1756 ENET Vv Vv Vv 1794 AENx Vv Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 3 RSLogix 5000 Software RSLogix 5000 software lets you configure a 1756 ENBx or ENET module via another module that is in the chassis controller another communication module module to configure RSLogix 5000 software P S i P S D clele ControlLogix 5 B HININJIN f ControlLogix chassis gt Mi R B BIB chassis ZEEE l x 0 r 1756 CP3 or 1747 CP3 serial cable Use RSLogix 5000 software to assign e IP ad
171. en Only Input Data If this module is a And the And the module must Then select digital input Comm Format of the 1794 ACN update at the RPI of the Rack Optimization is Rack Optimization 1794 ACN update faster than the RPI of the nput Data 1794 ACN Comm Format of the 1794 ACN p Input Data is None digital input output Comm Format of the 1794 ACN update at the RPI of the Rack Optimization is Rack Optimization 1794 ACN update faster than the RPI of the Data 1794 ACN Comm Format of the 1794 ACN p Data is None digital output Comm Format of the 1794 ACN update at the RPI of the Rack Optimization is Rack Optimization 1794 ACN update faster than the RPI of the Output Data 1794 ACN Comm Format of the 1794 ACN p Output Data is None analog p p Data Name Slot Description A Comm Format x Revision pa fi 4 Electronic Keying Compatible Module q G 42420 G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab lf this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 10 8 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network H Click Next Y Requested Packet Interval RPI ms J Inhibit Module K J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails Wh
172. er scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller not structure s read receive the data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element name where name isthe first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element name where name isthe first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 9 Table 19 B Message to an SLC 500 or MicroLogix controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10
173. ercentage of time that the controller is powered off per week If a controller is off e 8 hr day during a 5 day work week e all day Saturday and Sunday Then the controller is off 52 of the time 1 total hours per week 7 x 24 168 hours 2 total off hours per week 5 days x 8 hr day Saturday Sunday 88 hours 3 percentage off time 88 168 52 C Using Table 25 A Worst case estimates of battery life on page 25 3 determine the estimated worst case battery life before and after the BAT LED turns on D For each year of battery life decrease the time before the BAT LED turns on by the percentage that is shown in the table Do not decrease the time after the BAT LED turns on Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery 25 3 IMPORTANT If the BAT LED turns on when you apply power to the controller the battery life may be less then the table below indicates Some of the battery life may have been used up while the controller was off and unable to turn on the BAT LED Table 25 A Worst case estimates of battery life Controller Temperature Time before BAT LED turns on Time after BAT LED turns on Power off 100 Power off 50 Yearly a POWeLem 1D decrease 1756 L1 60 C 8 months 8 months 24 16 days 25 C 18 5 months 30 5 months 16 28 days 0 C 20 2 months 33 7 mon
174. es Click the Serial Port tab S Controller Properties Ascii_examples Ox Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Mode Baud Rate fis20 Data Bits j l Parity None Stop Bits ho H Control Line No Handshake 7 Jo Continuous Garier ATS Send Delay fo x20 ms RTS Off Delay fo x20 ms 42251 Select System default Select the settings for your DF1 network Select Half Duplex Clear uncheck the Continuous Carrier check box default Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off dow lt c Y ry BERE K Click Apply Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 5 L Click the System Protocol tab M N Q 42388 Select DF1 Master Select the error detection method that your equipment uses Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller Is it critical to keep the poll list scan time to a minimum If Then select
175. es Rack Optimization No None Type or select the slot number where the module is installed How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Click Next Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 5 J Requested Packet Interval RPI ms K J Inhibit Module L e J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode ii J In step F which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault
176. etwork Procedure Remote 1 0 Network _ Aq Ca a JS ii oon 88888888 ControlLogix Chassis with FE PanelView Terminal 1756 DHRIO Module TE ages 2 1771 ASB Adapter 1 gt PLC 5 Controller I om d 1791 Block 1 0 1747 ASB Adapter 1794 ASB Adapter 42471 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 2 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network How to Use This Procedure To create and manage tags as you program your logic use these tips e To create a tag 1 Type the name for the tag 2 Right click the tag and choose New tag_name Clear Dest Right click the tag and choose Edit tag_name Properties If you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary tasks e Add a 1756 DHRIO Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add a Remote I O Adapter e Add a Block Transfer Module e Communicate with Block Transfer Modules using either of these procedures Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules e Address I O e Validate Connections e Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remo
177. ew O Datal3 MOV MOV Move Move Source name_of_panelview Data 3 Source counter ACC 0 0 Dest counter PRE Dest name_of_panelview O Data 3 0 0 42403 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 13 10 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Organize Your Unscheduled To transfer unscheduled data with the PanelView terminal organize the tags in the ControlLogix controller as follows Data lf data type And itis of the tag is part of a structure or array including an 1 0 device BOOL And the PanelView writes the data Then a Create a tag of the DINT data type b Copy bit z of the DINT tag to the BOOL tag PanelView reads the data a Create a tag of the DINT data type b Copy the BOOL tag to bit z of the DINT tag not part of a structure or array a Create a tag of the DINT data type b Convert the BOOL tag to an alias for bit z of the DINT tag lt 32767 PanelView writes the data a Create a tag of the INT data type b Move the INT tag to the DINT tag DINT PanelView reads the data a Create a tag of the INT data type b Move the DINT tag to the INT tag gt 32767 PanelView writes the data a Create a tag of the REAL data type b Move the REAL tag to the DINT tag DINT Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 PanelView reads the data where z is bit 0 to 15 of the DIN
178. ex Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 How Are We Doing ANE Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the future Thank you for taking the time to provide us feedback Ty You can complete this form and mail it back to us visit us online at www ab com manuals or email us at RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Pub Title Type ControlLogix System Cat No 1756 L1 L1Mx Pub No 1756 UM001E EN P Pub Date August 2002 PartNo 957689 28 L55Mxx L63 Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature 1 needs improvement 2 satisfactory and 3 outstanding Overall Usefulness 1 Za OB How can we make this publication more useful for you Completeness 2 3 Can we add more information to help you all necessary information procedure step illustration feature is provided Taa example guideline other explanation definition Technical Accuracy 1 2 3 Can we be more accurate all provided information l is correct text illustration Clarity 1 2 3 How can we make things clearer all provided information is easy to understand Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form Your Name Location Phone Your Title Function Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments No there is no need to contact me Yes please call me Yes please email me at Yes
179. ey C In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag_name D From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK e condition MSG e J E 4 E Type Unconfigured e Message Control message M7 e e Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e In this procedure you use a PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write message which requires 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 19 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from an RSView project When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix Write integers to an RSView project controller condition messag
180. for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag_name From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK e condition E MSG e 4 FE 4 E Type Unconfigured e Message Control message M7 e e Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 15 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller condition
181. for the module G e name_of local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 17 H J Inhibit Module J Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue o
182. h instance complete the following steps 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET A 1 Right click local_ENB ENET and select New Module 2 Select ETHERNET MODULE and choose OK E E EF m SEE Fults l lt Unspecified gt Sets WW OUTS 42820 3 Type a name for this PanelView instance 4 Select Data DINT 5 Select the JP Address button and type the IP address of the PanelView terminal Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 6 6 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Name Description J Comm Format Data DINT Address Host Name C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecitied gt m Connection Parameters 6 7 yoy Assembly Instance Size Input O opa feeb owp a 4 Bzw Configuration f es Status Output MAE 6 Type the assembly instance numbers for this PanelView instance For this instance Type this Input Assembly Type this Output Assembly Type this Configuration 42820 number Instance Instance Assembly Instance 1 7 6 2 9 8 3 11 10 4 13 12 5 15 14 6 17 16 7 19 18 8 21 20 7 Type the following sizes for the input output and configuration data For this size Type Input 100 Output 100 Configuration 8 Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1 Communicate with a PanelView
183. hat contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element name where name isthe first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Configure Dial Up Communications 23 9 Table 23 B Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address
184. hat the cable is connected to From the Device drop down list select Logix 5550 Serial Port Click Auto Configure Does the dialog box display the following message Auto Configuration Successful If Then Yes Click OK No Go to step 6 and verify that you selected the correct Comm Port Click Close Chapter 2 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure when you want to perform any of the following Procedure over an EtherNet IP network e download a project e go online and monitor a controller e upload a controller RSLogix 5000 Software i ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 ENBx or ENET Module LETTS 42473 switch How to Use This Procedure IMPORTANT Before you use this procedure configure the 1756 ENBx or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Configure an Ethernet Driver e Select a Path Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 2 2 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network Configure an Ethernet In this task you configure an RSLinx driver to communicate with Dri devices on an EtherNet IP network You can configure the driver to river communicate with up to 63 devices on this network such as 1756 ENET modules or PLC 5E controllers A Go to RSLinx software B From the Com
185. he execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Complete this step for any message that a PLC 5C controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over an ControlNet network MEATA This procedure uses RSLogix 5 software revision 3 x A Using RSLogix 5 software open the project for the PLC 5 controller B Display the set up screen for the message C Specify the following parameters For this section Andthisitem Specify This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count
186. he 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A O Gohhguraton 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 e F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 13 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 1680200 16 02FF 164
187. igure a Slave Controller message based Complete this step A Open the RSLogix 5000 project hen Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler H E Tasks MainT ask 3 68 MainProgram Program Tags E MainRoutine CI Unscheduled Programs 42376 Right click Controller name_of_ controller and select Properties Click the Serial Port tab o Controller Properties Ascii_examples iof x Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Mode Baud Rate fisz00 Data Bits je Parity None Stop Bits ho H Control Line No Handshake f J Gontinuous Garter BTS Send Delay O x20 ms RTS Off Delay 2 K0ms 42251 Select System default Select the settings for your DF1 network Select Half Duplex Clear uncheck the Continuous Carrier check box default Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 9 H Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay I Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off dow J Click Apply K Click the System Protocol tab Genera
188. ile in Run Mode 42401 I In step F did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 9 K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the controller to fault major fault Then Notes Select the check box continue operating L Click Finish Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 10 10 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Create Aliases In this task you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I
189. in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 23 10 Configure Dial Up Communications Table 23 C Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is And you want to For this item Type or select read receive data integer s Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_ buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 C Click the Communication
190. ion Click the Port Configuration tab 5 _ 6 _ gt gt 7 8 _ gt 10 11 42472 Clear uncheck the Obtain IP Address from Bootp Server check box Type the IP address for the module Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one Type the gateway address for the module if you need one Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 15 9 Will you use host names to specify other EtherNet IP devices a e When you send a message or configure a remote ENB or ENET module will you use a host name instead of an IP address If Then Yes Go to step 10 No Go to step 12 10 Type the IP address of the server or servers that contain the DNS database for the domain 11 Type the name of the domain of the module 12 Choose OK Check the Module To make sure that this procedure was successful look at the front of the module For this module Check this indicator For this indication 1756 ENET OK LED solid green 1756 ENBx four character display IP address of the module 1756 AENx NETWORK STATUS flashing green or steady green Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 16 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Configure a Module Using To configure a module using BOOTP software BOOTP e Install BOOTPServer Software e Connect the Hardware e Enter the Default Network Settings e Configure the Module e Disable BOOTP e Save the Relation List Install BOOTPSer
191. ision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 9 K J inhibit Module L e Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box I If communication with the modules fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a modules fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 11 10 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 4 Add the Other Controller E 1 0 Configuration Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 i 5 1756 CNB B name_of_localcnb 4 Adda PLC 5C cont
192. it 4 of the screen_a_bit array screen_a_bit 4 LR Clear Dest yalue_3 oe This rung moves counter ACC a DINT value to element 5 of the screen_a_DINT array A numeric display on the PanelView shows the value MOV Move Source counter ACC 0e Dest screen_a_DINT 5 pe alarm_ack and alarm are aliases for the I O tags of the PanelView alarm_ack alarm lt pv_a l Data 3 4 gt lt pv_a 0 Data 2 2 gt 42857 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 6 10 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Configure the PanelView 1 Start PanelBuilder32 software Terminal 2 Open an existing PanelBuilder application or create a new application 3 From the Application menu select Settings 4 Click the Comms Setup button Communications Setup Ethernet Terminal Ethernet Lab nterScan Delay 100 ms Etheret Contig lt _ 5 42818 5 Click the Ethernet Config button Ethernet Configuration 21x 6 _ gt l DHCP Enabe 7 gt IP Address B D 40 Cencel 8 Subne Mask E a E Help 9 gt Gateway Address n n n f M 6 Clear uncheck the DHCP Enable check box 7 Type the IP address of the PanelView terminal 8 Type the subnet mask for the PanelView terminal if necessary 9 Type the gateway address for the PanelView terminal if necessary 10 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P A
193. ite send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Click the Communication tab Select the 1756 DHRIO module and click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 17 18 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network F Specify the remaining communication properties For a message to a Type or select ControlLogix controller 1 Type a comma 1 5 2 Type the port number from which the message exits y For this port Specify eee name_of_DHRIO backplane port of a 1756 controller or module 1 name_of_DHRIO 42466 ControlNet port of a 1756 CNB module 2 EtherNet IP port of a 1756 ENBx or ENET module channel A of a 1756 DHRIO module channel B of a 1756 DHRIO module 3 3 Type a comma 4 Type the address of the next hardware device e g controller module For a device ona Specify ControlLogix backplane slot number ControlNet network node number EtherNet IP network IP address or DNS name DH network 8 followed by the node number e g 8 37 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 until you have specified the destination controller PLC 5 controller 1 4 2 SLC 500 controller l i i C CP DH
194. k Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Yes CO oO ON oorrFwoh From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 8 14 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can c
195. k 10 z Backplane Link 30 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel amp DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined 1756 CNB Slot 1 CNET Link 100 E 6 1756 CNB Network address 2 Backplane Link 30 J 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel A DH Link 40 Channel B DH Link Undefined 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel 4 DH Link 40 Channel B DH Link Undefined 1756 CNB Slot 1 CNET Link 100 1756 CNB Network address 1 Backplane Link 10 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel A DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined 42190 42191 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network 18 3 Configure a routing table for each 1756 DHRIO module that is along the route or path to the other controller Step Detailed actions A For each network and each Here is an example ControlLogix backplane in your system designate a unique link ID number ControlNet network link ID 100 DIC D C l HIN ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane RIB backplane link ID 10 link ID 30 0 0 DH network DH network link ID 20 link ID 40 INS B Connect the hardware 1 Install the 1756 DHRIO module 2 Connect the chassis to a network that you can
196. k the sign tags in the offline RSLogix 5000 project tags in the ControlLogix controller _ Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 L Offline L f Online J Next to Offline click the sign controller scope tags Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 Offline arrays and structures at array_1 the controller scope program scope tags counter_1 Program MainProgram Online K On the left select the entry that contains the required tag address Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 7 14 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 controller scope tags Offline arrays and structures at array_1 the controller scope counter_1 program Program MainProgram scope tags Online bool_1 dint_1 real_1 single elementtags BOOLs DINTs REALs etc L On the right double click the tag that contains the required data i e the address for the RSView tag M Click Accept N If this is an RSView32 project go to Validate an RSView32 Tag Create a Unsolicited Topic A Display RSLinx softwa
197. k the address of the module New Entry Ed 00 00 BC 03 62 37 42859 2 Type the IP address for the module 3 Choose OK 16 46 24 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 46 19 00 00 BC 03 62 37 The module shows up in the Relation List Delete 00 00 BC 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 The status line shows that the software sent the address to the module gt 42860 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 19 Disable BOOTP Each time you turn on the module what do you want it to do If you want the module to Then Notes Use the same configuration Go to step 1 This disables BOOTP for the module It no longer requests a configuration from BOOTP servers Request a configuration from a BOOTP Go to Save the e This leaves BOOTP enabled for the module When you turn off server Relation List on the module it loses its configuration information page 1 19 e Use this option only when a BOOTP server is continually available to configure the module m Relation List New Ethernet Address MAC _IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Delete 00 00 6C 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 Enable 1 _4 2 _ gt Disable Renew Add 42860 1 In the Relation List select the module 2 Choose Disable Status The status line shows that BOOTP is disabled for the module p Disable BOOTP Command Successful 42892
198. l Serial Port System Protocol Ten eases Pi I ae m Eror Detection L Protocol DF1 Master BCC C CRC i 0 gt Station Address jo ka V Enable Duplicate Detection N Transmit Retries 3 ACK Timeout 50 x20 ms Reply Message Wait 5 x20 ms P gt Polling Mode Message Based slave can initiate messages 42388 L Select DF1 Master M Select the error detection method that your equipment uses N Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box O Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller P Do you want to ignore messages from slave stations If Then select No Message Based slave can initiate messages Yes Message Based slave cannot initiate messages A slave station can only send a message when it receives a message from this controller master Q Click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 22 10 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 5 Configure a Slave Controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the slave controller a Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler H E Tasks MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs nae Right click Controller name_of_contro
199. l send the message Station slot number of the controller that is sending the message Local or Remote Addressing Remote L In the Remote Routing Configuration dialog box specify the following parameters For this parameter Type or select Bridge Device 1785 KA5 Bridge 5130 KA Local ID Virtual Link ID from Step D Local KA5 arbitrary number between 1 and 107 RSLinx requires an entry but this configuration does not use the entry Remote ID number that designates the backplane of the ControlLogix chassis Use a different number for each backplane M Click OK N Click Done and confirm the update of the topic Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 14 16 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Add the 1756 CNB Module A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline en Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler Tasks MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends 3 6 Data Types i User Defined Predefined CR Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration lt q 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D gt Name I Slot fo H S E a A Revision fi fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt F 42377 Description D Type a name
200. lication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 29 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1680300 16 03FF g gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 30 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options
201. lick OK 9 Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 6 14 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A O Gohhguraton 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 gt A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 15 Ste
202. ller and select Properties Click the Serial Port tab S Controller Properties Ascii_examples Iof x Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Mode Baud Rate fis20 Data Bits je Parity None Stop Bits ho H Control Line No Handshake J Continuous Carrier BTS Send Delay 0 20 ms RTS Off Dely O 20m 42251 Select System default Select the settings for your DF1 network Select Half Duplex Clear uncheck the Continuous Carrier check box default Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off dow Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 11 J Click Apply K Click the System Protocol tab 42388 L Select DF1 Slave M Select the error detection method that your equipment uses N Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box O Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller P Click OK Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 22 12 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Com
203. mber of modules that this message reads 3 Configure the message a MSG Type Block Transfer Read Message Control BTR il h gt R gt On this tab For this item Type or select Configuration Message Type Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements 1 The dialog box requires an initial value Destination Tag BTR_int_buffer read To create this tag A Click New Tag B Type the name C In the Data type box type INT length where length equals the length variable of the B7_inputtag from page 20 18 D Choose OK Communication Path Path to the 1756 DHRIO module A Click Browse B Select the RIO MODULE with which you want to communicate C Choose OK This complete the Module Address properties Although your logic will change the path and module address the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial set of properties RIO or ControlNet RIO Cache Connection check box Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Clear the Cache Connection check box Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 21 Enter the Message Properties for Each Module a Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags lt J Controller Fault Handler J Power Up Handler Tasks 388 MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine o 42376 1 Double click Controller Tags 2 Enter the message properties for each BT module
204. me I Slot fo H S E a A Revision fi fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt F 42377 Description D Type a name for the module G e name_of local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 11 4 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network H t f Inhibit Module t J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produ
205. message EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 H CRES File Arith Logical CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos Write integers to a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller condition fal_control FAL 4 E CRES gt File Arith Logical CEN Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG J E 4 5 Type Unconfigured CEN Message Control message CDN gt CER gt Where dint array Is an array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int _buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 17 16 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click M B Select a configuration for the message Table 17 A Message to a ControlLogix controller If you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type Type or select
206. minal e Organize Your Scheduled Data e Organize Your Unscheduled Data e Configure the PanelView Terminal e Create PanelView Tags e Schedule the ControlNet Network To check your work do the following task e Validate Connections Add the Local 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module g Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler Tasks 3 68 MainTask 4 68 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends 3 6 Data Types oR User Defined EA 44 Predefined CR Module Defined C3 1 0 Configuration lt q B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 3 D gt Name PO Slot p E Description o g f Revision M i Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt F 42377 D Type a name for the module i e name_of local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab lf this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E E
207. mmunicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Monitor Connections Table of Contents v Chapter 12 When to Use This Procedure sivas ay ce ARE 12 1 Route a ControlNet Message 6544 45 nnana aaa 12 2 Chapter 13 When to Use This Procedure 3 844 0 PHS aaaea 13 1 How to Use This Procedure sick nananana aaa 13 2 Add the Local 1756 CNB Module o naonna anaana 13 2 Add the PanelView Terminal 0 004 13 5 Organize Your Scheduled Data naana be ded h eae 13 8 Organize Your Unscheduled Data onnaa auauna 13 10 Configure the PanelView Terminal 13 12 Create PanelView Tags ecg edie isl oie cet She asd ee 13 14 Schedule the ControlNet Network 00 13 16 Validate Connections lt 2 cova hie eee isos geek ee a 13 17 Chapter 14 When to Use This Procedure 3 45 wiped db oul seed 14 1 How to Use This Procedure ii co Gus ehs wp Gta ba Ade G 14 1 Configure a ControlNet Diver yin a8 Sul oes Coe ee ee Sos 14 2 Select a Communication Method 14 3 Create a Polled TOpiC errana be Ped eke Sh ee Rae eS 14 4 Create a Polled Node circate dab mi ere Bead oe en eee 14 6 Import Logix5000 Tags nosau aaa a 14 7 Create am LOK Fle ie ecg keee trana ee Ee ake ev sete 14 7 Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility 14 8 Use the Utility to Create a CSV File eed ace eek ho 14 8 Import
208. mmunications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 16 4 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Step 2 Create Aliases In this step you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I O points devices As an alias for an I O point each tag e provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point e represents the value of the point When one changes the other reflects the change EXAMPLE o The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices start is an alias for the push button at bit 1 of word 0 of the module motor is an alias for the starter contactor at bit 0 of word 0 of the 1756 DNB in slot 5 of the local chassis When the push button is module 1756 DNB in slot 5 of the local chassis When motor on start is on turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt Local 5 Data 0 0 gt lt Local 5 Data 0 1 gt lt Local 5 0 Data 0 0 gt J E IE aa J E IE Si motor lt Local 5 0 Data 0 0 gt JE ws A From the Logic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags
209. modules 43015 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 24 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules SIZE 5 Size in Elements Source BT_output 0 0 pe Dim To Vary 0 Size BT_output_modules 0e 43035 BTW EN BT W_dints_to_ints MOV 6 E_ cFE Move Source BTW_cfo BTW_index REQ_LEN Oo Dest BTW_dints_to_ints LEN pe File Arith Logical Control BTW_dints_to_ints Lenath 0e Position 0e Mode ALL Dest BTW_int_buffer_write BT W_dints_to_ints POS D Expression BT_output BTW_index BTW_dints_to_ints POS 43035 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 25 BTW _dints_to_ints DN 7 MOY Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index Channel 00 Dest BTW Channel B e MOY Move Source BTW_cfo BTW_index Group 0 Dest BTW Group oe co Copy File Source BTW_cfg BT W_index Path Dest BTw Path Length 1 BTW DN 8 Qu 9 Equal Source BTW_ index 0e Source B BT_output_modules D Type Block Transfer Write Message Control BTW fj MOY Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index REG_LEN 0 Dest BT W REG_LEN De MOV Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index Rack 8 000 Dest BTW Rack SH 000 MOY Move Source BTW _cfglBTw_indes Slot 0 Dest BTW Slot 0e MSG hKD gt R gt 43036 ADD Add Source 1 Source B BTw_index o Dest BTW _index pe 43
210. municate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network If you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary task e Add the Local 1756 CNB Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add the 1771 ACN Module e Communicate with Block Transfer Modules using either of these procedures Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules e Address I O e Schedule the ControlNet Network e Validate Connections e Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 3 Add the Local 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module en Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler Tasks MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends 3 6 Data Types i User Defined Predefined O Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration lt q 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D gt Name I Slot fo H S E a A Revision fi fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt F 42377 Description D Type a name for the module G e name_of local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where
211. municate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 11 4 Database Import Export Wizard RSView project 6 Database Import Export Wizard All correct Finish t Database Import Export Wize E3 Correct 43072 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 7 12 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create a Polled Tag Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project Ry Your RAS iew Project B System l F Project Settings Channel dh Node M Scan Class g Tag Database 4 To create RSView tags one tag at a time im YOUR_RSYIEW_PROJECT RSY Vy Channel S amp a Node IM Scan Class User Accounts GJ Activity Log Setup Pt Bd A Double click Tag Database B Click New 43081 Tag Database A Tag Monitor User Accounts 42431 C Specify the properties of the tag E G Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 D E E G Click Device Click M Click M 42432 Select the name of the node that you created in Create a Polled Node and click OK Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 13 Node lt Local gt H Click the sign Node lt Local gt topic_1 topic_2 I Next to the topic from Create a Polled Topic clic
212. munications Step 6 Entera Message Regardless of whether you use standard polling or message based polling you must use a MSG instruction to transfer data between controllers A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 E 4 E Message e Message Control M A e e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag_name From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK e condition 4 E MSG e 4 E 4 E Type Unconfigured o CEND e Message Control message CDN gt e CER gt e Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communi
213. munications menu choose Configure Drivers C From the Available Driver Types list choose Ethernet devices D Choose Add New E If you want assign a descriptive name to the driver change the default name F Choose OK Station Mapping Add New Delete G In the Host Name column type the IP address or host name of an EtherNet IP device with which you want to communicate 42585 Examples e aurora6 e 130 151 136 164 H Do you want to communicate with another EtherNet IP device on this network Yes 1 Choose Add New 2 Go to Step G No Go to the next step I Choose OK J Choose Close Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network 2 3 Select a Path A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller B From the Communications menu select Who Active To expand a network one level do one Workstation of the following e Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet e Select the network and press AB_DF1 x DF1 the key e Click the sign p gt AB_ETH x Ethernet C Expand the Ethernet driver to the level of the controller Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 AB_ETH x Ethernet XXX XXX XXX XXX 1756 ENBx Backplane 1756 Ax pm FF xX 1756 L
214. ndler Tasks MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends 3 6 Data Types i User Defined Predefined CR Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration lt q 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK Name I Slot fo H e FE a A Revision fi fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt F 42377 Description D Type a name for the module G e name_of local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 3 H J Inhibit Module J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module
215. nections Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 16 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device When to Use This Use this procedure pie and a I O oe that dae part of a DeviceNet network Before you use this procedure set up the Procedure DeviceNet network e Connect the devices to the network e In RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software complete these actions Assign a node address to each device Configure each device Add the devices to the scan list of the 1756 DNB module How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 1 Add the 1756 DNB Module e Step 2 Create Aliases e Step 3 Set the Scanner to Run Mode Step 1 Add the 1756 DNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project Module Z 1 0 Configuration gH Adda local 1756 DNB module here x 1756 CNB x name_of_local_CNB z x 1756 CNB x name_of_remote_CNB q Addaremote 1756 DNB module here B Where is the 1756 DNB module located If it is in Then same chassis as controller right click O Configuration and select New Module remote chassis right click the remote 1756 CNB module and select New Medule C Select 1756 DNB and click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 16 2 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Compatible Module lt 4 H 42469 D Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O of the network m Type or selec
216. nel 1 Data Table Address Target Device Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local Node Addr octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller remote message Communication Command PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address This Controller starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Data Table Address Target Device Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local Bridge Addr octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the SLC 500 controller Remote Bridge Addr 0 Remote Station Address slot number of the ControlLogix controller converted to octal Remote Bridge Link ID Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 link ID of the backplane in which the ControlLogix controller resides Chapter 18 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network When to Use This Use this procedure to route a message from a PLC 5 or SLC 500 P d controller that is on a DH network to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller roceaure that is on a different network The controller that receives the message can be on a e different DH network e different type of network such as a
217. nfigure Routing Tables ft os teh eee mA 17 3 Configure a 1756 DHRIO Channel 17 8 Add a 1756 DHRIO Module 65 Fak ee he Speke ee 17 11 Entera Mess ge sonrie ea mida u EEE a 17 14 Configure the Message ses n aaan 17 16 Stagger the Messages n n nana 17 20 Access ControlLogix Data ots nb Yad ee oe de au hy 17 20 Chapter 18 When to Use This Procedutes i s nnana ud gee eee Stee 18 1 Configure Routing Tables soi cg etcetera PS 44g gd ed be aoe 18 2 Configure a PLC 5 or SLC 500 Message cow GE ks 18 6 Chapter 19 When to Use this Procedure sac ie ne wie Ka Ae 19 1 How to Use This Procedure nananana oe eee Sw BS 19 2 Step 1 Connect the Controller to an AIC view tak etek aes 19 3 Step 2 Configure the Serial Port onnan auaa aaaea 19 4 Step 3 Enter a Message Gun tate eS ata ote Stee 19 6 Step 4 Configure the Message nnna anana aaa 19 8 Step 36 Check the LED oi acne usme Au wide Eu ao 19 10 Step 6 Stagger the Messages nonna anaana 19 10 Chapter 20 When to Use This Procedure 5 gaan hose a qo ha ag beens 20 1 How to Use This Pioceduire g kn io ee EV es wee ee aes 20 2 Add a 1756 DHRIO Module 0 000 000 eee 20 3 Add a Remote I O Adapter 0 0 0 0000 c eee ae 20 6 Add a Block Transfer Module 0 00005 20 9 Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module 20 10 Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 20 11 Write Configuration or Output Data T
218. ngth number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length dint_inputs array that stores the input data fromthe module DINT length name_of_ controller for use by the controller Where length controller Is the number of elements to transfer Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung The application writes configuration and output data to dints_output which is an array of DINTs Before the controller sends the data to the module the FAL instruction moves the values to int_buffer_write This converts them to 16 bit integers INTs Only include the msg_read EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer read message to the same module msg_read EN msg_write EN dints_to_ints FAL 4 E 4 E CRES gt File Arith Logical CEND Control dints_to_ints Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode ALL ER gt Dest int_buffer_write dints_to_ints POS Expression dints_output dints_to_ints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transfer read message to the same MESSAGE name_of_controller module controller msg_write block transfer write message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller dints_to_ints converts the 32 bit integers from the Logix5000 CONTROL name_of controller controller to 16 bit integers for the
219. nnel type the link ID of the corresponding network 3 Choose OK F Add the remaining communication 1 Right click the backplane and choose Add Module module s that are in the backplane 2 Select the type of device and choose OK chassis 3 Type or select the slot number of the module 4 Type the link ID s of the network s to which the module is connected 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 7 Step Detailed actions G To the network s created in the 1 Right click the link ID and choose Add Module previous step add the 2 Select the type of device and choose OK corresponding communication modules in other Controll ogix 3 Type the node or IP address of the module 4 Type the link ID s chassis For this module Type the link ID s 1756 ENET of the backplane of the module i e the l 1756 CNB ControlLogix chassis in which the module resides DH Bridge in the routine table of the added module 5 Choose OK H Repeat steps F and G until the routing table depicts the required networks Download and save the 1 To download the configuration to the module choose Apply configuration 2 To save a copy of the configuration as a file choose the Save to File button Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 17 8 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Configure a 1756 DHRIO Determine
220. node number 1 77 octal For example to specify an octal node address of 37 type 8 37 EtherNet IP network IP address four decimal numbers separated by periods or host name Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 21 J Repeat steps F through I until you have specified the destination controller The following examples depicts a communication path EXAMPLE Communication path from a Logix5000 controller to a Logix5000 controller over an EtherNet IP network Ethernet network IP address 127 127 127 12 BIE 5 E 5 Message 5N BIE 5E OJT OJT washer 2 127 127 127 12 1 0 where indicates washer name of the ENB or ENET module 2 Ethernet port of the ENB or ENET module 127 127 127 12 IP address of the ENB or ENET module in the destination chassis 1 backplane port of the ENB or ENET module in the destination chassis 0 slot number of the destination controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 5 22 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network K Complete the communication parameters If the message is to a Then PLC 5 controller 1 Leave the CIP button selected SLC 500 controller 2 Disregard the Cache Connection check box Logix5000 controller How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to e ControlLogix controller if Then e FlexLogix c
221. nt as described in step F Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 Data 1 C conveyor l Slot 1 Data 1 C startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor However the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the A Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format a structure associated with the communication module in the remote chassis actually transfers the data structure for the communication module e g ENB CNB LL T1 lt conveyor Slot 1 Data 1 gt Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 UJ mi Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 13 Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network B Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software C Has this network been scheduled before If Then No From the File menu select New a N gt CO oO OmN OoorFwWwnhr From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the networ
222. ntroller that receives the message The following example depicts the MultiHop entries for the example on page 12 1 MultiHop entries 311 where indicates the 3 node number of the 1756 CNB module on ControlNet network A 1 slot number of the 1756 CNB module on ControlNet network B 1 node number of the PLC 5C controller that is receiving the message Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 12 4 Route PLC 5 Messages Between ControlNet Networks Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 When to Use This Procedure Chapter 13 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Use this procedure to exchange data between a PanelView terminal and a ControlLogix controller over a ControlNet network 42521 ControlNet Networ IMPORTANT Before you use this procedure your system must meet these requirements e Each 1756 CNB module communicates with no more than three PanelView terminals e Each PanelView terminal communicates scheduled data with only one controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 13 2 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure f you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary task e Add the Local 1756 CNB Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add the PanelView Ter
223. number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 19 Table 5 C Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller sc
224. number to which this device is wired Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 23 EXAMPLE Address a digital device that is wired to a 1771 I O module adapter module for rack number 4 1 0 Configuration 5 1756 CNB D Local_CNB 417771 ACN Remote_1771 input device group 2 bit 0 Remote_1771 1 Data 2 0 ala I s EE BE LL pi 4243E Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 24 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network A B Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software C Has this network been scheduled before If Then No From the File menu select New From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters mJ RUNS In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network
225. o 43029 1 Click the Drive tab 2 Select the catalog number of the amplifier 3 Optional Select the two attributes of the AXIS object that you want to access via either a GSV instruction or tag name Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 24 16 Program Motion Control 1756 M08SE Select the Motor and Feedback 1 i Offset Dynamics Gains Output Limits Faul General Units Conversion Drive Motor Feedback Homing Motor 2 Catalog Number knon 3 gt Feedback Type lt none gt 43030 1 Click the Motor Feedback tab 2 Select the catalog number of the motor 3 In step 2 did you select a catalog number If Then Yes Go to step 4 No Select the type of feedback 4 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Program Motion Control 24 17 Run Hookup Tests ATTENTION These tests may cause an axis to move even with the controller in program mode After you complete the Test Output amp Feedback test do not change the polarity This may cause an axis runaway condition To run the hookup diagnostics for an axis e Download Your Project and Go Online e Display the Properties for the Axis e Complete the Hookup Tests Download Your Project and Go Online 1 Create and configure all the motion modules and axes 2 Save your project 3 Download your project 4 Verify that a connection is established with each module in the T O configur
226. o a Block Transfer INCI UE sep eei de Ge Eee ink BUR eh eG che Bs od sen gp beet 20 13 Configure the Messages ose yaar in use ie ee 20 14 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Configure Dial Up Communications Table of Contents vii Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules 20 15 Create a User Defined Data Type nnana anaana 20 17 Create the Data Array naana aaaea 20 18 Send the Message to a BT Module 20 19 Enter the Message Properties for Each Module 20 21 Convert the INTs to DINTS onanan aaa aaa 20 22 Step to the Next BT Module cas anaana 20 23 Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules 20 24 Address VO es 65pm te kes Patan WBNS ala 4 halagg ob PRE A Pee 20 26 Validate Connections 24 4455 os ut Pod a 20 28 Stagger the Messages o n fA Bina ache k Bapta hoa Sond 20 30 Chapter 21 When to Use this Procedure cik caaariorueke meen 21 1 How to Use This Procedure yas 6 4A OA BS Ree EO 21 1 Step 1 Connect a Serial Cable n n a a bend haheenda areas 21 2 Step 2 Configure a Serial Driver vs 00d a6 a atta Batol 21 3 Step 3t Selecta Pathe hine Kain Gay A ek Kee eS 21 4 Chapter 22 When to Use this Procedure nananana aaa 22 1 How to Use This Procedure aint de See eee 4 22 2 Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems 22 2 Step 2 Select a Polling Mode ny pa a eae eS Keka 22 3 Step 3 Configure
227. o produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 10 4 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Add the Remote 1794 ACN Module 1 0 Configuration x 1756 CNB x name_of_local_CNB lt __ A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of 1794 ACN that you are using and click OK C _y Name Node i D Description 4 Chassis Spe me t E F p Comm Format Rack Optimization x Revision a fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 lt t G 42433 C Type a name for the ACN module Use a name that identifies the T O of this adapter D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the number of I O modules on this rail F Are most of the modules on this rail digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None G How closely must any module at this location match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying H Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P Aug
228. o this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 I Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 5 8 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network J Requested Packet Interval RPI ms K J Inhibit Module L J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode oie J In step D which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a m le fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M
229. odule and choose Edit Module 1756 DHRIO module 2 For each channel type the link ID of the corresponding network 3 Choose OK F Add the remaining communication 1 Right click the backplane and choose Add Module module s that are in the backplane 2 Select the type of device and choose OK chassis 3 Type or select the slot number of the module 4 Type the link ID s of the network s to which the module is connected 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network 18 5 Step Detailed actions G To the network s created in the 1 Right click the link ID and choose Add Module previous step add the 2 Select the type of device and choose OK corresponding communication modules in other Controll ogix 3 Type the node or IP address of the module 4 Type the link ID s chassis For this module Type the link ID s 1756 ENET of the backplane of the module i e the l 1756 CNB ControlLogix chassis in which the module resides DH Bridge in the routine table of the added module 5 Choose OK H Repeat steps F and G until the routing table depicts the required networks Download and save the 1 To download the configuration to the module choose Apply configuration 2 To save a copy of the configuration as a file choose the Save to File button Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 18 6 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500
230. oject offline ENET module Ba Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Ta 6 8 MainTask 3 68 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs C3 Trends 3 6 Data Types Ca User Defined 8 Predefined Ca Module Defined C3 140 Configuration lt q __ 42376 2 Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then Yes Go to Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module No Right click 0 Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 4 4 Communicate with 1794 I O Over an EtherNet IP Network C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecitied gt Description 4 Name i m Address Host Name 5 Slot 2 faa Revision Reo 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 t 42579 6 4 Type a name for the module 5 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 6 How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module Howeve
231. ollers are on And there is Then the message is same network only one ControlLogix controller in local the chassis more than one ControlLogix remote controller in the chassis different networks gt remote Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 21 MEA This procedure uses RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software revision 3 x A Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software as required open the project for the PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller B If the message is from a SLC 500 controller in the MSG instruction specify the following For this For a Select Target Device gt PLCS Local Remote local message Local remote message Remote C Display the set up screen for the message D Select a set up Table 17 D Set up for a message from a PLC 5 controller to a ControlLogix controller For a In this item Specify local message Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address This PLC 5 starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number port through which the message exits Data Table Address Target Device Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local DH Node Octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller
232. ollowing rung The SIZE instruction determines the number of elements in the first dimension Dim 0 of the B7_input array Since this dimension contains one element for each BT module this instruction determines how many modules the MSG instruction must read A subsequent rung uses this number to determine the end of the sequence of MSGs BT_input SIZE Size in Elements Source BT_input 0 0 0e Dim To Vary 0 Size BT_input_modules 0e 43014 2 Right click each undefined tag select New name and assign the following properties Description data from each BT module e The first dimension represents each module e The second dimension represents the data from a module Data Type DINT number length Scope name_of_ controller controller BT_input_modules number of modules that the MSG instruction must read Where number DINT name_of_ controller controller Is the number of modules that this message reads length Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 maximum number of elements in any of the block transfers Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 19 Send the Message to a BT Module 1 Enter the following rung The MSG instruction reads the input values from a BT module and stores the values in B7R_int_buffer_read e Each time the instruction is done it automatically restarts and sends another message e Prior to each message the series of MOV and COPY
233. ommon Procedures publication 1756 PM001 Program Motion Control The following figure shows several rungs of a motion control application program Rung 0 Enables the Feed and Cut axes when you press the n servo_on button Rung 1 Jogs the Feed axis in the positive direction when you press the jog_plus button Rung 2 Jogs the Feed axis in the reverse direction when you press the jog_minus button Rung 3 Stops the Feed axis when you release with the i jog_plus button or the jog_minus button End jog_plus MS0_1 DN Je ii pamine MeN jog minus jog_plus piee y a servo on MSO Mso J Motion Servo On N Motion Servo On EN d3 Axis Feed jt N gt Axis Cut je Motion control MSO_1 R gt Motion control MSO_2 24 21 rM Motion Axis Jog Axis Feed jt Motion control MAJ_1 Direction 0 Speed 30 Speed units of Maximum More gt gt a Motion Axis Jog Asis Feed jt Motion control MAJ_2 Direction 1 Speed 30 Speed units of Maximum Accel rate accel_rate 2 e Accel units of Maximum Decel rate decel_rate 2 e Decel units of Maximum Profile S Curve Merge Enabled Merge speed Current MAS Motion Axis Stop Axis Feed lt Motion control MAS_1 Stop Type Jog Change Decel No Decel rate decel_rate 2 Decel units of Maximum Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 24 22 Program Motion Control Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P Aug
234. ommunicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A O Gohhguraton 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 e F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 15 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults
235. on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 Click Next Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 7 9 Requested Packet Interval RPI ms 10 J Inhibit Module 11 J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode ii 9 In step 4 which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device on the rail must update None No RPI is required Go to the next step 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box 11 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a module fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail
236. ontroller i 16 or less Logix5000 Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked controllers more than 16 1 Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the Logix5000 controllers most frequent messages 2 Is this message to one of those controllers If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box L Click OK Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 23 Complete this task for any message that a PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over an EtherNet IP network IMPORTANT Access ControlLogix Data This
237. ontroller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic H Click Finish Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 11 Consume a Tag In RSLogix 5000 software A B C z From the Logic menu select Edit Tags From Scope select name_of_controller controller Only tags that are controller scope can consume other tags Select the tag in this controller that will consume the produced tag and press the ALT Enter keys 42353 Select the Consumed option button Select the controller that contains the produced tag Type the name of the produced tag Select the same data type as the produced tag Type or select the time between updates of the tag Use the highest value permissible for your application Choose OK Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 5 12 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over t
238. oped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Click the Communication tab Is the other controller in the I O configuration If Then Yes 1 Select the other controller and choose OK 2 Go to step K No Select the ENB or ENET module and choose OK In the Path text box type a comma Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 5 20 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 G Type the port number from which the message exits For this port Specify backplane port from a 1756 controller or module 1 DF1 port from a 1756 L1 controller 2 ControlNet port from a 1756 CNB module EtherNet IP port from a ENB or ENET module DH port over channel A from a 1756 DHRIO module DH port over channel B from a 1756 DHRIO module 3 H Type a comma I Type the address of the next hardware device e g controller module For a device ona Specify ControlLogix backplane slot number DF1 network Station address 0 254 ControlNet network node number 1 99 decimal DH network 8 followed by the
239. oped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 22 16 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Table 22 C Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_ buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Num
240. or Faults Date andTime Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol G 1 rere Error Detection gt gt Protocol DH485 v l C ace CAC H t Station Address fo 42588 J Breble Duplicate Detection G Select DH485 H Type the address of the controller on the DH 485 network Follow these guidelines e Address 0 is typically reserved for the programming tool e Address 1 is typically left open to swap out a controller Most controllers have a default address of 1 e The maximum address is 31 e To optimize network performance assign addresses in sequential order e Assign initiators such as personal computers the lowest addresses This minimizes the time required to initialize the network I Click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 19 6 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 3 Entera Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 4 6 Message o CEND e Message Control M F CDND e A CER gt e e 42424 B In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag condition lt and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag_name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag_name From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK MSG
241. or this item Message Type Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first elem ent of the tag that contains data in the other controller write send the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number o f elements to transfer Destination Element Table 5 B Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s first elem And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type ent of the tag for the data in the other controller Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_ buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements
242. ored in nonvolatile memory permitted replacement battery assembly 1756 BATA 1756 L55M23 stored in nonvolatile memory not required but permitted not stored in nonvolatile memory permitted 1756 L55M24 stored in nonvolatile memory not required but permitted not stored in nonvolatile memory highly recommended 1756 L63 stored in nonvolatile memory not required but permitted requires a 1784 CF64 Industrial CompactFlash card 31325 m not stored in nonvolatile memory highly recommended How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure do the following steps e Estimate Battery Life e Replace a Battery Assembly Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 26 2 Maintain a 1756 BATM Battery Module Estimate Battery Life When the battery is about 50 percent discharged the controller provides the following warnings e On the front of the controller the BAT LED turns on solid red e A minor fault occurs type 10 code 10 To estimate how long the battery will support the memory of the controller 1 Determine the temperature C 1 in below the battery module 2 Determine the percentage of time that the controller is powered off per week EXAMPLE If a controller is off e 8 hr day during a 5 day work week e all day Saturday and Sunday Then the controller is off 52 of the time 1 total hours per week 7 x 24 168 hours 2 total off hours per week 5 days x 8 hr day Saturday
243. ores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller serial_port 1 8 message EN MSG 4 F 4 E Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message CDN gt t C ER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 E RES File Arith Logical EN Control fal_control Length DN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos EXAMPLE Write integers to a PLC 5 controller When serial_pori 1 3 turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller serial_port 1 3 fal_control FAL 4 E RES File Arith Logical EN Control fal_control Length DN gt Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG 4 E 4 E Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message CDN gt C ER gt 42387 Where Is an dint array array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 23 8 Configure Dial Up Comm
244. orks Route a ControlNet To send a message from a PLC 5C controller to a PLC 5C controller on Message a different ControlNet network MANA This procedure uses RSLogix 5 software revision 3 x A Using RSLogix 5 software open the project for the PLC 5 controller that sends the message B Display the set up screen for the message C Specify the following parameters For this section And this item Specify This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in this PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message MultiHop Yes D Click the MultiHop tab To Address Type To Address This PLCS 2 1756 CNB Node dec E ControlLogis Backplane N A 1756 Backplane Slotfdec lt F 42426 E Type the ControlNet node number of the 1756 CNB module that is on the same ControlNet network as the controller that sends the message F Type the slot number of the 1756 CNB module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Route PLC 5 Messages Between ControlNet Networks 12 3 G Press the Insert key To Address Type To Address de cher 1756 CNB Node dec ri 1756 Backplane Slot dec N A ControlNet Nodefdec 17484 H Select 1756 CNB I Type the ControlNet node number of the co
245. our computer and a controller Controller e Connect a Serial Cable e Configure a Serial Driver Connect a Serial Cable 40043 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 25 1 Obtain a 1756 CP3 serial cable You can also use a 1747 CP3 cable from the SLC product family but once the cable is connected you cannot close the controller door If you make your own serial cable e Limit the length to 15 2m 50 fv gt e Wire the connectors as follows Workstation Controller 1 CD 1 CD 2 RDX 2 RDX 3 TXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 4 DTR COMMON COMMON 6 DSR 6 DSR _ 7 RTS 7 RTS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9 9 42231 e Attach the shield to both connectors 1756 CP3 cable 20884 2 Connect the cable to the controller and to your workstation Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1 26 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure a Serial Driver 10 Start RSLinx software From the Communications menu select Configure Drivers From the Available Driver Types list select RS 232 DF1 Devices Click Add New Click OK to accept the default name for the driver From the Comm Port drop down list select the serial port on the workstation t
246. owing e Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756 DHRIO module e Connect each chassis to an EtherNet IP ControlNet or DH network 3 Power up each chassis Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 17 6 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Step C Display the routing table Detailed actions 1 Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following e Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet e Select the network and press the l F AB_DF1 x DF1 key e Click the sign 2 Se Expand the network from step B until you see the 1756 DHRIO module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax p gt F x 1756 DHRIO Right click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration 4 Click the DHRIO Routing Table tab D Define the link ID of the backplane 1 At the top of the routing table right click the backplane link and choose in which the 1756 DHRIO module Edit Module resides 2 Type the link ID of the backplane and choose OK E Define the link IDs of the 1 Right click the 1756 DHRIO module and choose Edit Module 1756 DHRIO module 2 For each cha
247. p Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A O Gohhguraton 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 15 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display
248. p Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1680300 16 03FF g gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 6 16 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 7 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to communicate with tags in either of the following types of RSView projects Procedure e RSView32 project e RSView Machine Edition project developed with RSView Studio software RSView32 or RSView Machine Edition project e le ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 ENBx or ENET Module E 42473 switch How to Use This Procedure IMPORTANT Before you use this procedure configure the 1756 ENBx or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Modul
249. perating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 14 18 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Entera Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 4 6 Message o CEND e Message Control M F CDND e A CER gt e e 42424 B In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key C In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag_name D From the Scope list select name_of_controller controller and click OK e condition MSG e J E 4 E Type Unconfigured e Message Control message M7 e e Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message e ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e In this procedure you use a PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write message which requires 16 bit integers e Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer a
250. please contact me via Return this form to Allen Bradley Marketing Communications 1 Allen Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124 9705 Phone 440 646 3176 Fax 440 646 3525 Email RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Publication Tcca 5 21 January 2001 PN 95510702 Other Comments PLEASE FASTEN HERE DO NOT STAPLE PLEASE FOLD HERE BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE Allen Bradley RELIANCE ELECTRIC SIA DODGE Rockwvell Automation 1 ALLEN BRADLEY DR MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124 9705 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES PLEASE REMOVE ASCII Character Codes Character Dec Hex Character Dec Hex Character Dec Hex Character Dec Hex ctrl NUL 0 00 SPACE 32 20 64 40 96 60 ctrl A SOH 1 01 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61 ctrl B STX 2 02 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62 ctrl C ETX 3 03 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63 ctrl D EOT 4 04 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64 ctrl E ENQ 5 05 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65 ctrl F ACK 6 06 amp 38 26 F 70 46 102 66 ctrl G BEL 7 07 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67 ctrl H BS 8 08 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68 ctrl I HT 9 09 41 29 l 73 49 i 105
251. publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you aware of safety considerations The following annotations and their accompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazard avoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of a potential hazard Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices oro circumstances that can lead to personal injury or 1 death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Introduction Updated Information Deleted Information Summary of Changes This release of this document contains new and updated information To find new and updated information look for change bars as shown next to this paragraph The document contains the following changes This change Starts on page Addition of information on the battery life of the 1756 BA1 battery 25 3 when you use it in a ControlLogix5563 controller Addition of information a 1756 BATM ControlLogix battery module 26 1 including how to e estimate battery
252. r you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying 7 Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 8 Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 I O Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 5 Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET A 1 Right click local_ENB ENET and select New Module 2 Select the type of AEN module that you are using and click OK i p a i Compatible Module 42816 3 Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O on this rail 4 Are most of the modules on this rail digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None 5 Type or select the number of I O modules on this rail Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 4 6 Communicate with 1794 I O Over an EtherNet IP Network Address Host Name Name Description Comm Format Rack Optimization Chassis Size f Revision EN fi E Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 IP Address q 7 a Host Name lt Unspecitied gt Electronic Keying Compatible Module t 42816 6 How closely must any module in this slot match the information
253. r 5 When to Use This Procedure oauan ee oe ee bee ea 5 1 Before You Begis o respe tik a En aoe E Re eb es 5 1 Select a Communication Method 5 2 Produ ea Tagi nearr oie a Reena ng eee eaan ein 5 3 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 5 4 Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 5 6 Add the Other Controller he fhe eG amp bo Ge dae ance 5 9 CONSUINE A Tag ss Tatia ka sia Pa wy hud doe so ee OS 5 11 Validate COnnecionsyaaiw cis ad be tas wx ad ache 5 12 Does Another Controller Require the Data 5 13 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 5 14 Enter a Message were Gals te ese be a 5 16 Configure the Message n on pnt Pug Geer Bekid a 5 18 Stagger the Messages o n n naana a 5 22 Access ControlLogix Data xz ayy a co Gye esha ae Aa aan 5 23 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Table of Contents iii Chapter 6 When to Use This Procedure 0 0 0 0000000 ceca 6 1 Betore You Bein sy anecs pisu See SSS ees ee tee ans 6 1 How to Use This Procedure noaua 6 ee ded eres ed 4 6 2 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 6 3 Add the PanelView Terminal 0 0002 6 5 Organize Your DA gen uaaa brit hoe amp RRB Bn oe 6 8 Configure the PanelView Terminal 6 10
254. r Scoped Tags button if it is available All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Select the I O device that the tag represents If the device is And it Comm Then Format is digital Data e g Input Next to name slot X Click the sign 1 Data Output Data 2 Click the Data member 3 To the right of the Data member click M 4 Click the point number of the device 1 Click name slot X 2 To the right of the selection click M 3 Click the point number of the device Rack Optimization analog input p 1 Next to name slot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click Chz nputData analog output p 1 Next to name slot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click ChzOutputData Where Is name name of the 1794 ACN module slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 Chz channel that the device is wired to G Press the Enter key or click another cell Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 10 12 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network When you finish the Tags window should look similar to the following Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 2 Data 1 C conveyor 2 1 Data 1 C startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 2 of the rail named conveyor Even if the I O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format A
255. r Support Centers click on Contact Information Internet gt 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com Your Questions or Comments on this Manual If you find a problem with this manual please notify us of it on the enclosed How Are We Doing form Allen Bradley ControlLogix DH FlexLogix PanelView PLC 5 RSLinx RSLogix RSNetWorx RSView32 and SLC are trademarks of Rockwell Automation ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd Ethernet is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 BP 3A B 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA
256. r an EtherNet IP Network 4 13 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 7 established Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work F 1 0 Configurat down through the tree A VO oinguan 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 F A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module_1 A 1 17xx YYY module_2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval API l 7S ms 2 0 750 0 ms fereeenseansasneesesanencnsraney I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 4 14 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the Index tab 3 Type module faults Con
257. r character display IP address of the module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 13 Configure a Module Using To configure a module using RSLinx software RSLinx Software e Connect the Hardware e Configure the Port e Check the Module Connect the Hardware 1 Install the module 2 Connect your computer to a module with which you can already communicate The module must be in the same chassis as the module that you want to configure To set up communication between your computer and a controller see Connect Directly to a gt Controller on page 1 24 3 Turn on the power to the module Configure the Port 1 Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following e Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet e Select the network and press the key e Click the sign p gt AB_DFI x DF1 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 1 14 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 2 3 4 6 7 8 Expand a network until you see the module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax pm F x 1756 ENB Right click the module and choose Module Configurat
258. r the addresses in the order that you want them polled Tag Name Value Z list _priority poll eee list priority poll 0 total number of priority stations list priority poll 1 leave blank list_priority poll 2 address of the first station to poll list _ priority poll 3 address of the second station to poll F list_priority poll address of the next station to poll Z Inthe list_normal_poll tag step B enter the addresses of the normal stations to poll e If this controller master sends its messages in the polling sequence step R include this controller in the list e Enter the addresses in the order that you want them polled Tag Name Value Z list_normal_poll ees list_normal_ poll 0 total number of normal stations list_normal_ poll 1 leave blank list_normal_ poll 2 address of the first station to poll list_normal_ poll 3 address of the second station to poll F list_normal_ poll address of the next station to poll Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 22 8 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Determine if you must complete this step If you are using this polling mode Then standard Go to Step 5 Conf
259. r this item Type or select CIP With Source ID Communication Method Source Link Remote ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step L Destination Link Virtual Link ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step D Destination Node 77 RSLinx reserves node 77 for DDE topics H Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 7 22 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create an Unsolicited Node A Open the RSView project im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project 3 x Edit Mode Your AS iew_Project B System Project Settings i Channel E Channel de Node q B Node AM Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts Activity Log Setup ed oe ee ed ent IW Scan Class a Tag Database Le Tag Monitor 43081 User Accounts 4 B Double click Node Y Data Source Direct Driver OPC Server DDE Server D Name V Enabled Sceee SS Name gl E 42430 C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click M F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G In the Access Path box type the name of the topic from Create a Unsolicited Topic H Click Accept I Click Close Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 23 Create an Unsolicited Tag Project Explorer Your_RS
260. ransportation To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60 C for more than 30 days Replace a Battery Because the controller uses a lithium battery you must follow specific precautions when handling or disposing a battery ATTENTION The controller uses a lithium battery which contains potentially dangerous chemicals Before handling or disposing a battery review Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 A Turn on the chassis power B Does the existing battery show signs of leakage or damage If Then Yes Before handling the battery review Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 No Go the next step C Remove the old battery LOGIX 5000 RUN ovo top no connection middle black lead bottom red lead 30167 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery 25 5 D Install a new 1756 BA1 battery ATTENTION Only install a 1756 BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller E On the front of the controller is the BAT LED off If Then Yes Go the next step No 1 Check that the battery is correctly connected to the controller 2 If the BAT LED remains on install another 1756 BA1 battery 3 If the BAT LED remains on after you complete Step 2 contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor LOGIX 555
261. ray of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 14 20 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Configure the Message Table 14 1 Message to a RSView project If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type In the MSG instruction click On the Configuration tab specify the following parameters Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as N7 0 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element logical address such as N7 0 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Num
262. re B From the Communications menu select Configure Client Applications C Click the Virtual Link ID tab D Do you want to use the same Virtual Link ID for each workstation in your system Node or IP addresses are sufficient to distinguish between workstations If Then Yes 1 Record the Virtual Link ID number which you will use in subsequent steps 2 Click OK No 1 Enter a unique Virtual Link ID for the workstation 2 Click OK 3 Close the RSLinx software If you configured RSLinx software to start as a service you must also stop the service 4 Re open the RSLinx software E From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration F In the bottom left corner of the window click New G Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 15 H Click the Data Collection tab I Specify the following parameters For this item Do this Processor Type Select PLC 5 Data Collection Mode 1 Clear the Polled Messages check box 2 Select the Unsolicited Messages check box J Click the Advanced Communication tab K Specify the following parameters For this item Type or select Communication Driver driver for the network across which you will send the message Station slot number of the controller that is sending the message Local or Remote Addressing Remote L In
263. represents the value of the point or channel When one changes the other reflects the change The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices Start is an alias tor the push button that is wired to point 1 ot the motor is an alias tor the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 ot module that is in slot 2 of the local chassis When the push button the module that is in slot 0 of a remote chassis named conveyor is on Startis on When motor turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt Local 2 Data 0 gt lt Local 2 Data 1 gt lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt T aide CD motor lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt q E 42435 A From the Logic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram Show fShow All zj Sot Tag Name 7 Alias For Base Tag Type Tag Name 42421 p Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 13 B Select the scope of the descriptive tag C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W D Click the V E Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it is available All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Select the I O device that the tag represents If the device is Then digital 1
264. rminal Node Address InterScan Delay E _ gt E l ho ms 42395 Type the ConrolNet node number of the PanelView terminal Under Node Name right click End of Node List and select Insert Node Aa Allen Bradley PLC End of Node List 42396 G Select ControlLogix5000 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 13 NEIWOIK INOOES __Nodename Node address Node tye Allen Bradley PLC End of Node List 42396 H Type a name for the ControlLogix controller I Type the path to the ControlLogix controller Use the following format space ry cnb address 1 controller slot where is cnb address ControlNet node number of the 1756 CNB module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller controller slot slot number of the ControlLogix controller J Click OK K Click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 13 14 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Create PanelView Tags A On the PanelView screen create the required object B Double click the object C Click the Edit Tag button Tag Name Data Type D Bit E m Messaging Type Unscheduled Node Name C Scheduled Description Tag Address Tag Initial Value c 42397 D Type a name for the object E Select a data type that matches the data type of the tag in the ControlLogix
265. rolNet Network Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network 5 Download the PanelBuilder32 application to the terminal C Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software D Has this network been scheduled before If Then No From the File menu select New From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters OoorFwWwonhd In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Ss N gt OO oO CON Yes From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online
266. roller rd 1 1788 CNC 4 name_of_cnc Add a FlexLogix controller f 2 5 1756 CNB B name_of_remote_cnb lt Add a ControlLogix controller 42428 A What type of controller receives the message If it is a Then PLC 5C right click the local 1756 CNB module and select New Module FlexLogix controller right click the 1788 CNC module and select New Module ControlLogix controller right click remote 1756 CNB module and select New Module B Select the type of controller and click OK Name PO Slot p a 0 Description 0 g A Revision m BE Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 lt F 42377 C Type the name of the controller D Type or select the location of the controller If Type or select PLC 5C controller ControlNet node number of the controller FlexLogix controller always 0 ControlLogix controller slot number of the controller E How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab does not apply to a FlexLogix controller If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 11 F Click Next H J Inhibit Module I J Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 G Initially do you want the module to communicate with the
267. roups Trends Data Types 1 0 Configuration lt __ __ 1 Right click and select New Module 2 Select the your type of motion module and choose OK 3 Name Slot fo zl a h a z Revision fa fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 5 Description 42377 3 Type a name for the module 4 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 5 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab lf this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 6 Choose Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Program Motion Control 24 5 7 T Inhibit Module 8 s J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 7 Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller oper
268. rresponds to a specific BT module BTR DN BTF_ints_to_dints 2 amp 4 A NNN EE MOY Move Source BTR REQ_LEN 0e Dest BTA_ints_to_dints LEN pe File Arith Logical Control BTF_ints_to_dints Length 0e Position 0e Mode all Dest BT_input BTR_index BTR_ints_to_dints POS 0 Expression BTA_int_buffer_read BTR_ints_to_dints POS 43015 2 Right click each undefined tag select New name and assign the following properties Name Description Data Type Scope BTR_ints_to_dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 project controller Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 23 Step to the Next BT Module 1 Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module and the FAL converts it to DINTs B7R_ints_to_dints DN is on the ADD instruction increments the BTR_index This lets the MSG instruction read the next module BTF_ints_to_dints DN DD 3 Add Source 1 Source B BTA_index pe Dest BTF_index oe 43015 2 Enter the following rung If the EQU instruction is true the MSG instruction has read the last BT module The CLR instruction resets BTR_index to zero This lets the MSG instruction start the series of reads again starting with the first module EQU LR 4 Equal Clear Source BTF_index Dest BTR_index 0e pe Source B BT_input_
269. s Host Name Description z C P Address H Host Name lt Unspecitied gt E Slot 2 Revision 2 fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module i 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 7 18 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Entera Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 4 6 Message o CEND e Message Control M F CDND e A CER gt e e 42424 B In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter k
270. s Tag Import Utility Logix 5000 Tag Import msi where language is the language of your software For example for software that is in English open the Enu folder C Copy the file to your computer D To install the utility open the file Use the Utility to Create a CSV File A Start the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility 43071 B Type the name of the node from Create a Polled Node C Select the L5K file D Choose Search Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 E Select the tags to import F G H Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 9 Choose OK Choose Save Type the name of the topic from Create a Polled Topic Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 7 10 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Import the CSV File A Start the Database Import amp Export wizard e Start gt Programs gt Rockwell Software RSView Studio Tools Database Import amp Export Wizard e Start gt Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSView32 Tools gt Database Import amp Export Wizard B Complete the screens of the wizard Database Import Export Wizard Import RSView CSV files or Import RSView Studio CSV files iSView Studio CSW files 4 Database Import Export Wizard CSV file Database Import Export Wizard your option Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Com
271. s required Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 19 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs EXAMPLE Read integers from an RSView project When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller condition message EN MSG J E 4 H Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message lt DN gt CER gt message DN fal_control FAL 4 E CRES File Arith Logical CEND Control fal_control Length 2 DN gt Position 0 f Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos EXAMPLE Write integers to an RSView project When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the RSView project condition fal_control FAL J E CRES gt File Arith Logical END Control fal_control Length CDN gt Position 0 i Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint_array fal_control pos fal_control DN message EN MSG 4 4 E Type Unconfigured _ CEND Message Control message CDN gt CER gt 42424 Where Is an dint array ar
272. s the DTR signal from on to off E g Set DTR to normal not override Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Configure Dial Up Communications 23 3 Step 2 Configure the Serial A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller Port of the Controller aa Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags E3 Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks fa MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine CI Unscheduled Programs nae m B Right click Controller name _of_ controller and select Properties C Click the Serial Port tab o Controller Properties Ascii_examples Iof x Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol D Mode Lise Baud Rate fis20 E Data Bits je i Parity None Stop Bits ho H F Control Line No Handshake f Jo Continuous Lanier G BTS Send Delay O x20 ms H RTS Off Dely O 20m 42251 D Select System default E Select the settings for your DF1 network F Select Full Duplex G Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay H Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off dow I Click Apply Publication 1756 UM001
273. s with the same number of elements as dint array Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 22 14 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 7 Configure the Message Table 22 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If the data is structure s And you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type A In the MSG instruction click M B Select a configuration for the message Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller not structure s read receive the data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element name where name isthe first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Publication 1756 UMO
274. se B Select the 1771 ACN module with which you want to communicate C Choose OK Although your logic will control the path the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial path Slot slot number of the BT module Although your logic will control this value the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value Cache Connection check box Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Clear the Cache Connection check box Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 17 Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module a Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags lt J Controller Fault Handler J Power Up Handler o S Tasks 3 48 MainTask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 42376 1 Double click Controller Tags 2 Enter the BTR properties for each BT module Tag Name BTR_cfg Value Properties for the first gt BTR_cfg 0 BT module BTR_cfg 0 REO_LEN number of elements to transfer BTR_cfg 0 Slot slot number of the module independent of chassis addressing BIR_cfg 0 Path path to the 1771 ACN module A Right click and select Go to Message Path Editor B Select the 1771 ACN module C Choose OK Properties for the next B gt BTR_cfg 1 BT module Publication 1756 UM001E EN P
275. select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK Name I Slot fo H e FE a A Revision fi fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt F 42377 Description D Type a name for the module G e name_of local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 3 H J Inhibit Module t J Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules t
276. sfer Pipe nC Module 2 2 Block Transfer Read Data from a Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Word 1 int_buffer_read 0 dints_input 0 Word 2 int_buffer_read 1 dints_input 1 Word 3 int_buffer_read 2 dints_input 2 1 The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs 2 An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs p 2 Block Transfer Write DINTs fromthe Buffer ofINTs Data fora BT project module dints_output 0 int_buffer_write 0 Word 1 dints_output 1 int_buffer_write 1 Word 2 dints_output 2 int_buffer_write 2 Word 3 1 An FAL instruction converts the 32 bit integers DINTs from the Logix5000 controller to 16 bit integers INTs e Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs e The instruction stores the data in a temporary array of INTs 2 The MSG instruction writes the INTs from the temporary array to BT module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 9 8 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung Reads 16 bit integers IN
277. specified in the MSG instruction H Click Accept Validate an RSView32 Tag This procedure applies only to RSView32 projects A On the Edit Mode tab double click Tag Monitor Tag Name Value State t B Type the name of the RSView tag and press the Enter key Tag Name Value State tag_name C What does the State column display If Then valid The tag contains a valid value from the controller error There is a communication problem such as the e controller is not available e server is not running Ifa MSG instruction reads or writes the value you will see error until the controller sends the message for the first time Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 When To Use This Procedure Chapter 15 Monitor Connections Use this procedure to alert the system to the loss of communication with a device module in the I O configuration of the controller For example e failure of a module e loss of power to a chassis e failure of a communication module e break in a cable If the controller losses communication with a module e Data from that device does not update e The logic makes decisions on data that may or may not be correct EXAMPLE Loss of communication Controller B requires data from controller A If communication fails between the controllers then controller B continues to act on the last data that it received from controller A
278. ssage Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 If the message is to a PLC 5 controller Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 15 Click the Communication tab Click Browse Select that controller that receives the message and click OK Complete the communication parameters Then 1 Leave the C P button selected 2 Disregard the Cache Connection check box Logix5000 controller e ControlLogix controller e FlexLogix controller How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to If Then 16 or less Logix5000 Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked controllers more than 16 1 Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the Logix5000 controllers most frequent messages 2 Is this message to one of those controllers If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box G Click OK Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 11 16 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 7 Stagger the Messages Step 8 Access ControlLogix Data As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate t
279. stls S44 1 26 Chapter 2 When to Use This Procedure iui pete Ghee Bales 2 1 How to Use This Procedure nnna naaa aaa 2 1 Configure an Ethernet Driver n a aana aaaea 2 2 Selecta Pather Oe a eut a nea Ne ae BR Oe a hey hont 2 3 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Table of Contents ii Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 3 When to Use This Procedure is oe Re oe 3 1 Before Yo Begi 4 4 34 Se BOGE Rha BSE Enap eR Ehan 3 1 How to Use This Procedure sn iii eke Oi ere Eee ees 3 2 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 3 3 Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 3 5 Add I O Modules es a0 oe ae Reh Wie OA eae dea hed es 3 8 Create Aliases i 5 4 bal scott AS de ote bud Heels Wedd aN 3 12 Validate COnnecionss aiid ia ries Rie ee E O 3 15 Chapter 4 When to Use This Procedure 0 0 0 0 00000000000 4 1 Before You Use This Procedure 0 000005 4 2 How to Use This Procedure onnaa aaaea a 4 2 Add the local 1756 ENBx or ENET module 4 3 Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module 4 5 Add IYO MOdUleS ys 0 ole deste pind aay ae a b iets 4 8 Address VO A emits ho BS ONG Pe Swed Pace ek Si bee BEG 4 11 Validate Connections oosa Carne anak haaig ahha S 4 13 Chapte
280. t Wizard CSV file Database Import Export Wizard your option Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 11 4 Database Import Export Wizard RSView project 6 Database Import Export Wizard All correct Finish t Database Import Export Wize E3 Correct 43072 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 14 12 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create a Polled Tag To create RSView tags one tag at a time im YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT_RSY Project Explorer Your_RS iew Project Ry Your RAS iew Project B S System Project Settings Channel T Channel d Node Se Node IW Scan Class Tag Database A Tag Monitor User Accounts lll Scan Class g Tag Database 4 User Accounts oJ Activity Log Setup Pt Bd 43081 A Double click Tag Database B Click New 42431 C Specify the properties of the tag D E G 42432 D Click Device E Click M F Select the name of the node that you created in Create a Polled Node and click OK G Click M Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 13 Node lt Local gt H Click the sign Node lt Local gt
281. t number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 9 6 Select a Comm Format IMPORTANT If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g Listen Only Input Data If this module is a And the And the module must Then select digital input Comm Format of the AEN is update at the RPI of the AEN Rack Optimization Ha eGaincalion update faster than the RPI of the nput Data AEN Comm Format of the AEN is p Input Data None digital input output Comm Format of the AEN is update at the RPI of the AEN Rack Optimization POEURA update faster than the RPI of the Data AEN Comm Format of the AEN is p Data None digital output Comm Format of the AEN is update at the RPI of the AEN Rack Optimization Rack UpuiZaNoN update faster than the RPI of the Output Data AEN Comm Format of the AEN is p Output Data None analog p p Data 7 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 8 Click Next Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 4 10 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 9 Request
282. t the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE _ Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 13 I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a module fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 17 14 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 4 6 Message o CEND e Message Control M F CDND e A CER gt e e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name
283. t the slot number of the module F Type or select the number of input words that are mapped in the scanner plus 1 For example if inputs are mapped from word 0 to word 4 5 words enter a value of 6 5 input words 1 6 G Type or select the number of output words that are mapped in the scanner plus 1 z How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying I Click Next 42401 Publication 1756 UMO01E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 3 Is the module in a remote chassis If Then Yes Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc No Leave the RPI at the default setting Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor co
284. tab D In the Path box type the following path 2 0 Since dial up communications are point to point the actual address of the controller is not required E Leave the communication method at the default settings of e CIP e Cache Connections This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port F Click OK Configure Dial Up Communications 23 11 Step 6 Hang Up Enter the following logic to hang up After the remote controller receives the message message DN is on the AHL turns off the DTR line which causes the modem to hang up message DN Aer aly HL AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Channel 0 AND Mask 1 OR Mask 0 SerialPort Control modem_hangup_1 Channel Status Decimal 0 CEN gt J CDND gt t CER gt After the modem hangs up modem_hangup_1 EM is on the AHL instruction turns on the DTR line which readies the modem for the next call modem_hangup_1 EM ajae MAE Where message AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Channel 0 AND Mask 0 OR Mask 1 SerialPort Control modem_hangup_2 Channel Status Decimal CEN gt DN gt ER gt Is tag that controls the execution of the message MESSAGE data type 42393 modem hangup 1 tag that controls the execution of the AHL SERIAL_PORT_CONTROL data type modem_hangup_2 tag that controls the execution of the AHL SERIAL_PORT_CONTROL data t
285. te 1 0 Network 20 3 Add a 1756 DHRIO Module 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline SESSE Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags E3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler 3 Tasks Ga MainTask 3 68 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends 3 6 Data Types Ca User Defined Predefined CR Module Defined 3 140 Configuration lt 42376 2 Right click VO Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your series of 1756 DHRIO module and click OK 4 gt Name a zl Slot lt 5 Type Baud Rate Channel A DH z 57 6K Z ChannelB RIO z 57 6K lt 7 Revision Pf H Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 lt 8 42440 Description Parent Local 4 Type a name for the module i e name_of DHRIO 5 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 6 For the channel that is connected to the remote I O network select RIO 7 Select the baud rate of the network Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 20 4 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 8 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 9 Click Next 10 Requested Packet Interval RPI ms 11 J Inhibit Module 12 J Major Fault On Controller If Connec
286. te of 10 20ms etc I Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box J If communication with the modules fails how do you want the controller to respond If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic K Click Finish Your controller organizer should look similar to the following E E 140 Configuration J 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 2 Panel view name_of_panelview 42402 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 7 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 13 8 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Organize Your Scheduled Data lf data type And itis of the tag is part of a structure or array To transfer time critical data use the scheduled communications between the controller and the PanelView terminal And the PanelView writes the data Then Copy name_of_panelview I Data x y to the tag PanelView reads the data Copy the tag to name_of panelview 0O Data x y BOOL PanelView writes the data Convert the tag to an alias for
287. tents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1640100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1640300 16 03FF r gt 16 0fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 16 fe0c 16 ff00 16 ff0e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 5 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to transfer data from one controller to another Procedure controller over an EtherNet IP network e ControlLogix controller to another ControlLogix controller e ControlLogix controller to a PLC 5E or SLC 5 05 controller e PLC 5E or SLC 5 05 controller to a ControlLogix controller 9 a a Me ControlLogix Controller ControlLogix Controller switch cj 2 8 BARES E PLC 5E Controller SLC 5 05 Controller 42607 Before You Begin Before you use this procedure do the following 1 To produce and consume tags over an EtherNet IP network you must use 1756 ENBx or ENET B modules If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of
288. the controller Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Monitor Connections 15 3 If you want to determine if communication has timed out with a specific device Then Enter the following rung for the device and add the specific action to occur If communication times out with a device module in the 1 0 configuration of the controller the controller produces a fault code for the module e The GSV instruction gets the fault code for module_name and stores it in the module name fault tag e f module_name_fault is not equal to 0 then the controller is not communicating with the module NEQ module name GSV Get System Value CIP Object Class MODULE CIP Object Name module_name Attribute Name FaultCode Dest module_name_fault Where Is a Not Equal Source A module_name_fault Source B 0 42468 name of the module from the 1 0 configuration module name_fault DINT tag that stores the fault code for the module interrupt the execution of logic and execute the Controller Fault Handler A In the controller organizer right click the module and select Properties B Click the Connection tab C Select check the Major Fault If Connection Fails While in Run Mode check box D Develop a routine for the Controller Fault Handler See the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 15 4 Monitor Con
289. the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 11 8 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Determine if you must complete this step Module If you are sending a message to a Then FlexLogix controller Complete this step ControlLogix controller Go to Step 4 Add the Other Controller PLC 5C controller E 140 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of 1788 CNC module communication card that is in the FlexLogix controller and click OK C Name f Node 1 e st D z Description Slot E G Revision p fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 H 42427 C Type a name for the module D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 1 or 2 F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab lf this information must match Then select all including minor rev
290. the ENB or ENET modules in the local and remote chassis Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 3 2 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network How to Use This Procedure Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 IMPORTANT If the all the I O modules are in the same chassis as the controller no remote I O go to Add I O Modules on page 3 8 If you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary tasks e Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module e Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add I O Modules e Create Aliases e Validate Connections Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 3 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline g Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags E3 Controller Fault Handler C3 Power Up Handler Tasks Ea MainTask 3 68 MainProgram Ej Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends 3 6 Data Types Ca User Defined ER Predefined OR Module Defined E3 1 0 Configuration lt lt _q __ 42376 B Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module no Right click 0 Configuration and select New Mo
291. the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the ENB or ENET modules Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 5 2 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Select a Communication To communicate with another controller you have the following Method options If the other controller is And ControlLogix The data needs delivery at a specific rate Then Produce and consume a tag Go to Produce a Tag on page 5 3 The data is sent when a specific condition in your application occurs Send a message Go to Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module on page 5 14 PLC 5 The ControlLogix controller sends the SLC 5 05 message Send a message Go to Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module on page 5 14 The PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 sends the message Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Send a message Go to Access ControlLogix Data on page 5 23 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 3 Produce a Tag A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller that produces sends the data B From the Logic menu select Edit Tags IMPORTANT To produce a tag the tag must meet be e controller scope
292. the Remote Routing Configuration dialog box specify the following parameters For this parameter Type or select Bridge Device 1785 KA5 Bridge 5130 KA Local ID Virtual Link ID from Step D Local KA5 arbitrary number between 1 and 107 RSLinx requires an entry but this configuration does not use the entry Remote ID number that designates the backplane of the ControlLogix chassis Use a different number for each backplane M Click OK N Click Done and confirm the update of the topic Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 7 16 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Add the 1756 ENBx or A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline ENET Module a ERSE Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags 3 Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Handler a Tasks a MainT ask E23 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs 3 Trends 3 6 Data Types CR User Defined OR Predefined 4 Module Defined 3 140 Configuration lt 42376 B Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to Enter a Message no Right click 0 Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 17 D Name m Addres
293. the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 11 6 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network H How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying I Click Next J Y Requested Packet Interval RPI ms K Inhibit Module L J Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode pin J In step F which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 7 L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a module fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from
294. ther Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 15 D Name m Address Host Name Description z C P Address H Host Name lt Unspecitied gt E Slot 2 Revision 2 fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module i 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finish Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 5 16 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e 4 4 6 Message o CEND e Message Control M F CDND e A CER gt e e 42424
295. thernet To expand a network one level click the sign ye F AB _DF1 x DFI TCP 1 Ethernet C Expand the DF1 driver to the level of the controller Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 p xx 1756 Lx TCP 1 Ethernet D Select the controller and choose a button You may have to confirm the action To Choose monitor the project in the controller Go Online transfer a copy of the project from the controller to Upload RSLogix 5000 software transfer the open project to the controller Download Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 22 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to get information to and from remote controllers stations when e Your system contains three or more stations e Communications occur on a regular basis and require leased line radio or power line modems i io oE i 42378 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 22 2 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications How to Use This Procedure Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 If you have not already
296. ths 16 31 days 1756 L1M1 60 C 5 6 months 8 months 24 8 days 25 C 13 6 months 22 9 months 16 20 days 0C 16 8 months 27 9 months 16 25 days 1756 L1M2 60 C 4 months 7 4 months 24 6 days 25 C 11 7 months 20 1 months 16 18 days 0 C 16 0 months 26 6 months 16 24 days 1756 L1M3 60 C 2 6 months 4 9 months 24 4 days DS G 9 1 months 16 2 months 16 14 days 0 C 14 4 months 24 4 months 16 22 days 1756 L55M12 60 C 57 days 110 days 23 69 hours Use roots Tona 63 days 123 days 17 76 hours 0 C 60 days 118 days 17 73 hours 1756 L55M14 60 C 29 days 57 days 23 35 hours 25 C 30 days 61 days 17 37 hours 0C 24 days 48 days 17 30 hours 1756 L55M16 60 C 15 days 30 days 23 18 hours 25 C 13 days 27 days 17 16 hours 0 C 6 days 12 days 36 7 hours 1756 L55M22 Use the values for the 1756 L55M13 controller 1756 L55M23 1756 L55M24 Use the values for the 1756 L55M14 controller 1756 L63 60 C 22 days 43 days 23 6 hours BE 21 days 42 days 17 28 hours acc 14 days 28 days 17 2 5 days Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 25 4 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery Store Replacement Because a battery may leak potentially dangerous chemicals if stored Batteries improperly store batteries as follows Store batteries in a cool dry environment We ATTENTION ATTENTION recommend 25 C with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between 45 to 85 C such as during t
297. tion Fails While in Run Mode in 10 Type the rate at which the module must communicate with the controller 11 Initially do you want to prevent the module from communicating with the controller If Then Yes Select the check box No Leave the check box cleared unchecked EXAMPLE _ Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module e When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 5 12 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the controller to fault major fault Then Notes Select the check box continue operating 13 Click Finish Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 20 6 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Add a Remote 1 0 Adapter Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 In this task you add remote I 0 adapters for each rack or portion of a rack in the chassis
298. to enter logic and tag names see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PMO001 e All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope As you assign addresses click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I O tags e Use the following table to select the address of an I O device If the device is And it Comm Format is Then use this address digital Data e g Input Data Output name slot type Data bit Data Rack Optimization name slot type bit analog input Bp name slot type cCh InputData analog output pe name slot type Ch OutputData Where Is name name of the adapter module on the rail such as an AEN or ACN module slot slot number of the 1 0 module type type of device If Then input l output 0 bit point bit number of the device Ch channel that the device is wired to Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 4 12 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network e When you choose rack optimization for an I O module its tags are created as aliases for the tags of the adapter module In your logic you see the tag of the device as aliases for a tag of the adapter module The tag name of the adapter is in angle brackets tag name of the I O device tag name of the adapter conveyor 2 1 0 lt conveyor Data 2 0 gt fe a Ee I E Ae i 42435 alt Es Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Ove
299. ugust 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 11 11 Under Node Name right click End of Node List and select Insert Node Network Nodes Hode Address Hode Type a Path eC __ Allen Eradiey PLC a E EndofNedelist O Ao 42818 12 Select ControlLogix5000 Network Nodes Hode Address Path Hode Type 13 _e FP Allen Bradley PLC Cnd of Node List 42818 14 15 13 Type a name for the ControlLogix controller 14 Type the IP address of the ENB or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller 15 Type the path to the ControlLogix controller Use the following format space 1 controller slot where controller slot is the slot number of the ControlLogix controller 16 Click OK 17 Click OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 6 12 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Create PanelView Tags 1 On the PanelView screen create the required object 2 Double click the object 3 Click the Edit Tag button Tag Name Data Type 4 7 Bit x lt q 5 6 mM ing T R ogee ae Node Name C CIP C Assembly Object Description Tag ddress Tag Initial Value 1 gc 42856 4 Type a name for the object 5 In the ControlLogix controller is the address of this tag a bit BOOL within an array of BOOLs If Then select Yes bit No
300. unications Step 5 Configure the Message Table 23 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If the data is structure s And you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type A In the MSG instruction click M B Select a configuration for the message Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller not structure s read receive the data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element name where name isthe first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller t
301. use a logical address e g N7 0 to specify a value tag in a ControlLogix controller you must map files to tags e You only have to map the file numbers that are used in messages the other file numbers do not need to be mapped e The mapping table is loaded into the controller and is used whenever a logical address accesses data e You can only access controller scoped tags global data Map an Address 1 In RSLogix 5000 software open the project file for the controller whose data you want to access 2 From the Logic menu select Map PLC SLC Messages Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 A 2 Map a PLC SLC Address Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 PLC2 3 5 7 SLC Mapping x PLC 3 5 2 SLC Mapping OK File Number Cancel Help Delete Map PLC 2 Mapping Tag Name X 42260 3 For each file that is referenced in a PLC 5 or SLC command make a map entry a Type the file number of the logical address b Type or select the controller scoped global tag that supplies or receives data for the file number You can map multiple files to the same tag 4 For PLC 2 commands specify the tag that supplies or receives the data 5 Click OK Appendix B Estimate Execution Time This manual no longer contains information on the execution of instructions and motion tasks For this information see the Logix5000 Controllers Execution Time
302. use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Yes CO oO ON oorrFwoh From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 10 14 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Ste
303. ust 2002 MSG Type Block Transfer Write Message Control 43023 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 21 BTW DN 9 Add Source 1 ADD Source B BTWw_index pe Dest BTW_ index o 43023 QU LRA 10 Equal Source BTW_ index Dest BTW _index 0e 0e Source B BT_output_modules 43023 Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 22 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Address 1 0 To monitor or control an I O device assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic e For step by step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 e All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope As you assign addresses click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I O tags e Use the following table to select the address of an I O device If the device is Then use this address digital name type Data group bit analog element of the array that stores the data for or from this device Where Is name name of the remote I O adapter such as the 1771 ACN module e Use the name for the rack that contains the module to which this device is wired e Use the name from the 1 0 configuration of the controller type type of device If Then input l output 0 group group number of the module to which this device is wired bit point bit
304. ust 2002 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 5 Requested Packet Interval RPI ms J T Inhibit Module K J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode ii I In step F which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device on the rail must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc None No RPI is required Go to the next step J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic L Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 10 6 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Add 1
305. ust 2002 When to Use This Procedure How to Use This Procedure Estimate Battery Life Chapter 25 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery Use this procedure to ensure that the 1756 BA1 battery has sufficient capacity to maintain the memory of the controller and that the battery does not leak To complete this procedure do the following steps e Estimate Battery Life e Store Replacement Batteries e Replace a Battery When the battery is about 95 percent discharged the controller provides the following warnings e On the front of the controller the BAT LED turns on solid red e A minor fault occurs type 10 code 10 To prevent the battery from leaking potentially dangerous chemicals replace the battery at least as often as indicated in the following attention ATTENTION To prevent possible battery leakage even if the BAT LED is off replace a battery according to the following schedule below the chassis is 0 to 35 C No required replacement 36 to 40 C 3 years 41 to 45 C 2 years 46 to 50 C 16 months 51 to 55 C 11 months 56 to 60 C 8 months Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 25 2 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery To estimate how long the battery will support the memory of the controller A Determine the temperature C 1 in below the chassis B Determine the percentage of time that the controller is powered off per week EXAMPLE Determine the p
306. utton 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 I Click Next Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 7 J Requested Packet Interval RPI ms K J Inhibit Module L J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode ii J In step D which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond If communication with a module fails th ATTENTION communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 3
307. vel objects on the screen For example the BOOL 32 array gives you 32 bits for push buttons indicators etc 2 For each PanelView screen create a DINT array with enough elements for the word level objects on the screen For example the DINT 28 array give you 28 values for numeric entry controls numeric displays etc To access the I O tags of the PanelView use the following address format Table 6 A Address format for the 1 0 tags of a PanelView If the Then use this address PanelView writes the data name_of_panelview I Data x y PanelView reads the data name_of panelview 0O Data x y Where Is name_of_panelview name of the PanelView instance in the 0 configuration of the controller element of the PanelView input I or output O structure bit number within the input or output element Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network 6 9 To address the PanelView data in your logic you can have the following options e address the tags directly e copy the tags to other tags in your project e create alias tags EXAMPLE Address PanelView data This rung uses these I O tags of the PanelView pv_a I Datal2 0 and pu_a I Data 2 1 The rung controls a motor pv_al Data 2 0 pv_al Data 2 1 motor_on gt motor_on When a push button on the PanelView is pressed this rung clears a value The push button uses b
308. ver Software This procedure requires BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation You can find the software at either of these locations e RSLogix 5000 software CD ENU TOOLS BootP Utility folder BootPServer exe e www ab com networks Connect the Hardware 1 Install the module 2 Connect the module to the network 3 Turn on the power to the module 4 Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 17 The module sends its Ethernet address to the BOOTP server on a regular basis gt Enter the Default Network Settings 1 Start the BOOTPServer software R BOOTP Server File Tools Help BOOTP Request History hr min sec Ethernet Address MAC _IP Address Subnet Mask 16 51 28 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 51 26 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 51 24 00 00 BC 03 62 37 2 From the Tools menu choose Default Network Settings Default Network Settings x m Defaults Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 lt 3 Gateway 0 0 0 0 4 42890 3 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 4 Type the gateway address for the module if you need one 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 1 18 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Configure the Module 3 BOOTP Server 16 51 28 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 51 26 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 51 24 00 00 8C 03 62 37 lt 1 42858 1 Double clic
309. work remote data is sent at the actual packet Data is sent to the backplane at the RPI interval and at the end of every task e Over an EtherNet IP network remote data is sent close to the RPI on average Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 D 2 Determine When Data Is Updated Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Appendix E Reconfigure an I O module Use the Module Reconfigure message to send new configuration information to an I O module During the reconfiguration e Input modules continue to send input data to the controller e Output modules continue to controller their output devices A Module Reconfigure message requires the following configuration properties In this property Select Message Type Module Reconfigure To reconfigure an I O module 1 Set the required member of the configuration tag of the module to the new value 2 Send a Module Reconfigure message to the module Reconfigure an I O module When reconfigure 5 is on the MOV instruction sets the high alarm to 60 for the local module in slot 4 The Module Reconfigure message then sends the new alarm value to the module The ONS instruction prevents the rung from sending multiple messages to the module while the reconfigure 5 is on MOV reconfigure 5 reconfigure 6 F ONS Move Source 60 Dest Local 4 C ChOConfig HAlarmLimit 75 06 change_Halarm EN
310. x D Select the controller and choose a button You may have to confirm the action To Choose monitor the project in the controller Go Online transfer a copy of the project from the controller to Upload RSLogix 5000 software transfer the open project to the controller Download Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 2 4 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network Notes Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 Chapter 3 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This as sae aoe to monitor and control devices that wired to 1756 I O S Procedure acu e local modules e remote modules where 1756 ENBx or 1756 ENET B modules connect the local and remote chassis over an EtherNet IP network Local 0 Controller Remote 1 0 rt NE E ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 ENBx or ENET B Modules 42608 switch Before You Begin Before you use this procedure do the following 1 To communicate with 1756 I O over an EtherNet IP network you must use 1756 ENBx or ENET B modules If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure
311. x REG_LEN Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Slot 0 0 Dest BTR REG_LEN Dest oe co MSG Copy File Type Block Transfer Read Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Path Message Control BTR il Dest BTR Path Length 1 43020 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope BTR block transfer message that reads data from MESSAGE name_of_controller each BT module controller BTR_cfg array of configuration properties for each BT BT_CONFIGURATION name of controller module number controller BTR_index controls which BT module that the MSG DINT name_of_controller instruction reads controller Where Is the number number of modules that this message reads Publication 1756 UM001E EN P August 2002 9 16 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network co Copy File Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Path Dest BTR Path Length 1 On this tab For this item Configuration Message Type 2 Configure the message MSG Type Block Transfer Read Message Control BTR E Type or select Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements 1 Although your logic will control this value the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value Destination Tag BTR_int_buffer_read To create this tag A Click New Tag B Type the name C In the Data type box type INT Zength where length equals the length variable of the B7_input tag from page 9 14 D Choose OK Communication Path Path to the 1771 ACN module A Click Brow
312. x When you test this portion of the system clear the check box Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 20 8 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 11 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If you want the controller to fault major fault If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes Select the check box continue operating 12 Click Finish Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 9 Add a Block Transfer Module If Yes Do any modules require block transfers Then Complete the steps in this section Add a Block Transfer Module No Go to Address 1 0 on page 20 26 Though not required when the module is in the I O configuration you gain these advantages e It is easier to complete the communication path to the module e The I O configuration provides documentation about the module 0 Configuration x 1756 DHRIO x name_of_DHRIO Ch lt rack group size gt RIO ADAPTER name_of_adapter lt lt 1 Right click name_of_adapter and
313. ype Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 23 12 Configure Dial Up Communications Step T Stagger the As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the Messages execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each g message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence e Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UMO001E EN P August 2002 When to Use This Chapter 24 Program Motion Control The ControlLogix controller 1756 M02AE servo module or Procedure 1756 MO8SE SERCOS module and RSLogix 5000 software create an integrated motion control system 1756 M02AE Servo Module rive Position Velocity Motor LP lt Feedback Drive Position Velocity RSLogix5000 Sof ControlLogix Controli ppor ogix5 oftware ontrolLogix Controller Z5 Feedback Integrated Program Execution Axis Motion Configuration Programming

ControlLogix System User Manual - Columbia Electric Supply Pasco

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents